User Manual SRT1F

User Manual
SRT 1F Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications UMN

911-362/02C0000
Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
SRT 1F
Siemens Mobile Communications S.p.A. 2002 V.le Piero e Alberto Pirelli, 10 I-20126 Milano
Issued by Customer Documentation Department S.S. 11 Padana Superiore, km 158 I-20060 Cassina de Pecchi MI
Copyright (C) Fujitsu/Siemens 2002

Technical modifications possible without notice to customers. Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 1
Table of Contents GENERAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................1-1 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 1.2.7 1.2.8 1.2.9 1.2.10 1.2.11 1.2.12 1.2.13 1.2.14 1.2.15 1.2.16 1.2.16.1 1.2.16.2 1.2.16.3 1.2.16.4 1.2.16.5 1.2.16.6 1.2.17 1.2.17.1 1.2.17.2 1.2.17.3 1.2.17.4 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 General description.................................................................................1-1 Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment..........................................1-1 Equipment Features ...............................................................................1-1 SRT 1F Equipment Details .....................................................................1-6 Ordering Guide .......................................................................................1-6 BRU (Branching Network Unit) ...............................................................1-8 MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) ..................................................1-8 SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit) ....................................1-8 BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit)..............................................................1-9 General Specifications ..........................................................................1-10 General Information ..............................................................................1-10 Transmitter (TX) ...................................................................................1-11 Receiver (RX) .......................................................................................1-15 Modulator (MOD) ..................................................................................1-16 Demodulator (DEM) ..............................................................................1-16 Digital Processing .................................................................................1-17 Overall ..................................................................................................1-19 RF Interference.....................................................................................1-25 Countermeasures to Fading .................................................................1-26 Signal Interface for STM-1 System .......................................................1-27 Base Band Signal Interface ..................................................................1-27 Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface ................................................1-27 Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface .............................................1-28 Jitter......................................................................................................1-28 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) ................................................................1-28 BSI........................................................................................................1-29 Auxiliary Signal Interface ......................................................................1-29 Radio User Channel (RUC)...................................................................1-29 Way Side (WS) .....................................................................................1-29 Order Wire (OW) ..................................................................................1-30 User Channel (UC) ...............................................................................1-30 Mechanical Specification.......................................................................1-31 General.................................................................................................1-31 Rack construction .................................................................................1-32 Inter-Rack Connections ........................................................................1-32 Rack Layout..........................................................................................1-33
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
Table of Contents 1.3.5 1.4 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.2.1 1.6.2.2 1.6.2.3 1.6.2.4 1.6.2.5 1.6.2.6 1.6.2.7 1.6.2.8 1.6.2.9 1.6.3 1.6.4 2 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.4.1 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.3 Unit Layout............................................................................................1-35 Environmental Specification..................................................................1-37 Power Requirements ............................................................................1-38 General.................................................................................................1-38 Unit Power Consumption ......................................................................1-38 Frequency Plan and Antenna System...................................................1-39 General Information ..............................................................................1-39 Frequency Plan.....................................................................................1-39 U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6)............................1-43 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3) .............................1-44 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1) .................1-45 L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5) ...........................1-46 U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5)...........................1-47 L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6) ...........................1-48 U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)...........................1-49 L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 386-4) ...........................1-50 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6) ...........................1-51 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4) ............................1-53 RF Branching Network..........................................................................1-54 Equipment Configurations and Features.................................................2-1 SRT 1F System ......................................................................................2-1 Terminal..................................................................................................2-1 Baseband Interface.................................................................................2-4 Alternated and Co-channel Operation.....................................................2-4 STM-1 Signal Transmission ....................................................................2-8 STM-1 Electrical Signal Interface............................................................2-8 Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function).........................................................2-8 Space Diversity.....................................................................................2-12 MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................2-13 Top View of MSTU Adapter ..................................................................2-15 Engineering Orderwire (OW) ................................................................2-16 User Channel (UC) ...............................................................................2-17 Radio User Channel (RUC)...................................................................2-18 Wayside Traffic (WS)............................................................................2-19 Digital Communication Channel (DCC) .................................................2-20 OverHead Bit Access for SRT 1F System.............................................2-21
UMN
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION....................................................................................2-1
ii
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.5.7 2.5.8 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.2.1 2.7.2.2 2.7.2.3 2.7.2.4 2.7.2.5 2.7.3 2.7.3.1 2.7.3.2 2.7.3.3 3 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.1.1 3.1.1.2
Table of Contents MSOH and RSOH.................................................................................2-22 RFCOH.................................................................................................2-24 Radio Protection Switch System ...........................................................2-28 Outline of Radio Protection Switching ...................................................2-28 USW and BSW .....................................................................................2-30 Switching Priority ..................................................................................2-32 Switching Initiator and Operation Time .................................................2-33 Occasional Traffic (option) ....................................................................2-34 Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU)......................................2-35 Signal Interface.....................................................................................2-37 Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit.....................................................................2-37 Supervisory (SV) unit ............................................................................2-37 Timing Control Unit (TCU) ....................................................................2-42 Housekeeping (HK) unit........................................................................2-42 Embedded Communication Unit (ECU) (option)...................................2-43 Occasional Interface (OCC INTF) unit (option) ....................................2-43 Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF) unit (option) ..........................2-43 Baseband Interface Unit (BBIU)............................................................2-44 Optical Interface (OPT INTF) unit .........................................................2-44 MSP SW and BBC................................................................................2-48 Applications ..........................................................................................2-51 Co-Channel Operation ..........................................................................2-51 Synchronization ....................................................................................2-53 Synchronization Source ........................................................................2-53 Synchronization Mode...........................................................................2-54 Clock Mode...........................................................................................2-56 Quality Level (S1 byte)..........................................................................2-56 Line Clock Priority.................................................................................2-57 Orderwire Applications..........................................................................2-58 Orderwire Extension .............................................................................2-58 Digital-Through .....................................................................................2-58 Ring Protection .....................................................................................2-58 Installation preliminaries .........................................................................3-1 Storage, Unpacking and Inspection ........................................................3-1 Storage ...................................................................................................3-1 Preparation .............................................................................................3-2
INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................3-1
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
iii
Table of Contents 3.1.1.3 3.1.1.4 3.1.2 3.1.3 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.1.1 3.2.1.2 3.2.1.3 3.2.1.4 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 3.2.2.2 3.2.2.3 3.2.2.4 3.2.3 3.2.3.1 3.2.3.2 3.2.4 3.2.4.1 3.2.4.2 3.2.4.3 3.2.4.4 3.2.4.5 3.2.4.6 3.2.4.7 3.2.4.8 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.1.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.4.1 3.3.4.2 3.3.5 3.3.6 Unpacking and Inspection.......................................................................3-2 General Unpacking Method ....................................................................3-2 Storage of Spare Units ...........................................................................3-2 Accessories ............................................................................................3-3 Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers ..........................................................3-3 Warning and General Handling...............................................................3-3 Tools Required .......................................................................................3-3 Warning Messages .................................................................................3-3 Storage ...................................................................................................3-4 Handling .................................................................................................3-4 Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables....................................3-6 Tools Required .......................................................................................3-6 Preparation .............................................................................................3-6 Connection Procedure ............................................................................3-6 Disconnection Procedure ........................................................................3-6 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors............................................3-6 Tools Required .......................................................................................3-6 Procedure ...............................................................................................3-7 Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors .........................................3-7 Connector End-face Definitions ..............................................................3-7 End-face Zone Definitions.......................................................................3-7 Defect Definitions....................................................................................3-8 Scratch and Pit Defects ..........................................................................3-8 Chip Defects ...........................................................................................3-9 Crack Defects .......................................................................................3-10 Tools Required .....................................................................................3-11 Procedure .............................................................................................3-11 Rack Installation ...................................................................................3-11 Precautions...........................................................................................3-11 Suitable Places for Equipment Installation ............................................3-11 Safety Measures for Equipment Handling.............................................3-12 Tools Required .....................................................................................3-12 Preparation ...........................................................................................3-12 Bay Mounting........................................................................................3-13 Bay Securing ........................................................................................3-13 Rack Configuration ...............................................................................3-14 Shelf Configuration ...............................................................................3-16
UMN
iv
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 3.3.7 3.3.7.1 3.3.8 3.3.8.1 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.1.1 3.4.2 3.4.2.1 3.4.2.2 3.4.2.3 3.4.3 3.4.3.1 3.4.3.2 3.4.3.3 3.4.3.4 3.4.4 3.4.4.1 3.4.4.2 3.4.4.3 3.4.4.4 3.4.4.5 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 3.4.9 3.4.9.1 3.4.9.2 3.4.10 3.4.11 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.1.1 3.5.1.2 3.5.2 3.5.3
Table of Contents How to Install Shelves & Units ..............................................................3-18 Preparation of Shelves..........................................................................3-18 Mounting of Shelves .............................................................................3-20 Mounting of Slide-In Units.....................................................................3-22 Inter Shelf Connections.........................................................................3-26 SRT 1F Input ........................................................................................3-26 Warning Messages ...............................................................................3-26 Waveguide Connection.........................................................................3-27 Tools Required .....................................................................................3-28 Preparation ...........................................................................................3-29 Precautions...........................................................................................3-29 Connection of Primary Power Lead.......................................................3-29 Tools Required .....................................................................................3-29 Procedure .............................................................................................3-32 Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment........................................................3-33 Precautions...........................................................................................3-33 AMP hand Crimping Tool ......................................................................3-34 CRIMPING PROCEDURES ..................................................................3-36 Assembling of AMP Connector .............................................................3-37 Office Power Supply Check ..................................................................3-37 Tools Required .....................................................................................3-37 Procedure .............................................................................................3-37 Frame Grounding..................................................................................3-38 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms .................................................3-39 Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors ............................................................3-39 Inter shelf Connection for RPS, SV, and DCC ......................................3-41 Baseband Signal Cable Connection......................................................3-42 STM-1 electrical signal Interface...........................................................3-42 STM-1 optical signal Interface...............................................................3-43 Wayside Signal Cable Connection........................................................3-45 Inter shelf connection for CO-channel operation ...................................3-46 Connector and Connector Pin Assignment ...........................................3-48 Connectors Layout on Back Wired Board (BWB)..................................3-48 Connectors on the BWB of SCSU ........................................................3-50 Connectors on the BWB of BBIU ..........................................................3-51 Connector PIN assignment for OSSI ....................................................3-52 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 1 ............................3-53
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
Table of Contents 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 3.5.9 3.5.10 3.5.11 3.5.12 3.5.13 4 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.2.1 4.1.2.2 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.1.1 4.2.1.2 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.3.1 4.2.3.2 4.2.3.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.7.1 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.1.1 4.3.1.2 4.3.1.3 4.3.2 4.3.3 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 2 ............................3-54 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 3 ............................3-55 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 4 ............................3-56 Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 5 ............................3-57 Connector PIN assignment for Radio User Channel .............................3-58 Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm BUS ..................................3-59 Connector PIN assignment for EOW ....................................................3-60 Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC .................................................3-61 Connector PIN assignment for User Channel .......................................3-62 Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock ................................3-63 ACCEPTANCE OF THE SRT 1F ............................................................4-1 Perform Overall Visual Inspection...........................................................4-1 Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack .....................................4-2 Test Equipment Required .......................................................................4-2 Procedure ...............................................................................................4-2 Installation of the SRT 1F Slide-in Units..................................................4-3 Warning Messages .................................................................................4-3 Laser Warning ........................................................................................4-3 Electrostatic Discharge Warning.............................................................4-3 Slide-In Installation Procedures ..............................................................4-5 Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units ..................................................4-5 Inserting a Slide-In Unit...........................................................................4-6 Removing a Slide-In Unit ........................................................................4-7 Removing an Optical Unit .......................................................................4-8 Installing the MSTU Unit .........................................................................4-9 Installing SCSU Unit ...............................................................................4-9 Installing BBIU Unit ................................................................................4-9 Installing the Optical Interface (OPT INTF) Unit......................................4-9 Procedure ...............................................................................................4-9 SRT 1F Acceptance and Turn-Up Tests ...............................................4-10 Warning Messages ...............................................................................4-10 Laser Warning ......................................................................................4-10 Inserting Plugin Units ..........................................................................4-10 Electrostatic Discharge Warning...........................................................4-11 SRT 1F In-Station, Inter-Station and End to End Tests.........................4-12 Test Equipment Required .....................................................................4-13
UMN
ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP ................................................................................4-1
vi
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.1.1 4.4.2 4.4.2.1 4.4.2.2 4.4.3 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.1.1 4.5.2 4.5.2.1 4.5.3 4.5.3.1 4.5.3.2 4.5.3.3 4.5.4 4.5.4.1 4.5.4.2 4.5.4.3 4.5.5 4.5.5.1 4.5.5.2 4.5.5.3 4.5.6 4.5.6.1 4.5.6.2 4.5.7 4.5.7.1 4.5.7.2 4.5.7.3 4.5.8 4.5.8.1 4.5.9 4.5.9.1 4.5.9.2 4.5.10
Table of Contents Waveguide and Antenna Alignment Tests ............................................4-14 Waveguide Sweeping ...........................................................................4-14 Procedure for Return Loss Measurement .............................................4-14 Antenna Alignment ...............................................................................4-16 AGC Current Monitoring .......................................................................4-16 Antenna XPIC Optimization ..................................................................4-17 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms .................................................4-17 SRT 1F In-Station Performance Tests ..................................................4-18 Hardware Settings ................................................................................4-18 Default Values ......................................................................................4-18 Provisioning (Software Settings) ...........................................................4-18 Default Values ......................................................................................4-18 Transmit (TX) Local OSC Frequency....................................................4-19 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-19 Specification .........................................................................................4-19 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-20 Transmit Output Power Level................................................................4-21 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-21 Specification .........................................................................................4-21 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-21 Transmit Spectrum ...............................................................................4-23 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-23 Specification .........................................................................................4-23 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-24 Receiver (RX) AGC Range ...................................................................4-25 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-25 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-25 Optical Output Power Level ..................................................................4-27 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-27 Specification .........................................................................................4-27 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-27 Minimum and Maximum Optical Receive Level .....................................4-29 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-29 External Clock Supply...........................................................................4-31 Warning Messages ...............................................................................4-31 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-31 Rack Alarm Test ...................................................................................4-33
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
vii
Table of Contents 4.5.10.1 4.5.10.2 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.1.1 4.6.1.2 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.4.1 4.6.4.2 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.1.1 4.7.1.2 4.7.2 4.7.2.1 4.7.2.2 4.7.3 4.7.3.1 4.7.3.2 4.7.4 4.7.4.1 4.7.4.2 4.7.5 4.7.6 4.7.6.1 4.7.6.2 4.7.7 4.7.7.1 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.1.1 4.8.1.2 4.8.2 4.8.2.1 4.8.2.2 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-33 Test procedure......................................................................................4-33 SRT 1F Inter-Station Tests ...................................................................4-35 Receive (RX) Signal Level ....................................................................4-35 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-35 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-35 IF FREQUENCY RESPONSE...............................................................4-36 SPACE DIVERSITY EQUALIZATION...................................................4-40 ATPC Test (End to End LAB Test)........................................................4-45 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-45 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-45 SRT 1F End to End Station Performance Tests....................................4-47 Remote NE Management via DCC .......................................................4-47 DCC configuration ................................................................................4-47 Test ......................................................................................................4-49 Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test .....................................................4-51 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-51 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-51 Way Side Test ......................................................................................4-53 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-53 Way Side Transmission Test ................................................................4-53 BER Characteristics Test (Lab Test).....................................................4-55 Equipment Required .............................................................................4-55 Specification .........................................................................................4-55 BACKGROUND BER TEST..................................................................4-58 Synchronization ....................................................................................4-60 Clock Sources selection........................................................................4-60 Test ......................................................................................................4-62 MSP Switching Test..............................................................................4-63 Test Procedure .....................................................................................4-63 Appendix...............................................................................................4-65 MSTU Setting .......................................................................................4-65 MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................4-66 DADE setting for SD .............................................................................4-69 Hardware Setting ..................................................................................4-71 SV unit ..................................................................................................4-72 TCU unit ...............................................................................................4-73
UMN
viii
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 4.8.2.3 4.8.2.4 4.8.2.5 4.8.3 5 5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.5.1 5.3.5.2 5.3.5.3 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.2.1 5.4.2.2 5.4.2.3 5.4.3 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.6 5.6.1 A A.1
Table of Contents BSW unit ..............................................................................................4-74 OCC INTF unit ......................................................................................4-75 PE INTF unit .........................................................................................4-76 Provisioning through LCT .....................................................................4-77 LED Indications.......................................................................................5-1 LCT.........................................................................................................5-5 Start-up LCT Operation...........................................................................5-6 Alarm (Condition) Type and Description ...............................................5-11 Performance Monitor ............................................................................5-18 Analog Monitor......................................................................................5-21 Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI) ...............................................5-23 Radio Protection Switch ........................................................................5-24 Automatic Switching and Status Indication............................................5-26 Manual Control .....................................................................................5-26 SW PM Data.........................................................................................5-27 Auto Refresh.........................................................................................5-27 Notice for RPS Operation .....................................................................5-28 Power off of SCSU................................................................................5-28 Lockout .................................................................................................5-28 Power off of MSTU ...............................................................................5-28 Maintenance Control of Other Functions...............................................5-29 Loop Back.............................................................................................5-29 Protection Switch Operation (MSP).......................................................5-31 Multiplex Section Protection..................................................................5-31 TCU unit Protection ..............................................................................5-31 Synch Switch ........................................................................................5-31 ALS Release.........................................................................................5-32 Unit Replacement .................................................................................5-33 Fan Replacement .................................................................................5-33 MSTU and Other Units..........................................................................5-35 SV unit Replacement ............................................................................5-36 Returning Replaced Unit .......................................................................5-39 APPENDIX............................................................................................5-41 LCT Command Tree and Functions......................................................5-41 Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms................................................................... 1
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE ..............................................................................5-1
APPENDIX................................................................................................................... 1
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
ix
Table of Contents
UMN
911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1
1.1.1
General description
Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment
The SRT 1F series radio equipment is a high capacity (155 Mbit/s STM1) system designed for trunk line transmission applications. The SRT 1F series operate in the 4/5/U6/11 GHz radio frequency bands with 40 MHz frequency spacing, and in the U4/L6/7/L8/13 GHz radio frequency bands with 28.00, 29.00 and 29.65 MHz frequency spacing. The equipment is fully solid state and is designed to meet ITU-T and ITU-R Recommendations for long haul and high capacity digital microwave radio systems. The modulation scheme used is 64/128 QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) with forward error correction. The SRT 1F can be used in various types of SDH networks such as ring, media diversity or linear configurations, and over various communication routes , i.e., waterways, mountains, inter or intra-city routes. The SRT 1F accepts one synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM-1) signal per RF frequency for alternated operation, or two synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM1) signals per RF frequency for co-channel operation. The protection scheme is N+1 for alternated operation and (N+1)2 for co-channel operation. Various optional functions are provided, such as 2 Mb/s wayside traffic (carried by RFCOH and SOH respectively) and digital service channels (carried by RFCOH). Each RF channel can carry two wayside signals plus two digital service channels, and all protected by the N+1 Radio Protection System (RPS).
1.1.2
Equipment Features
The main features of the SRT 1F series radio equipment are; Completely solid-state Fully SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) compatible digital radio. Interconnectabilityy with other manufacturers SDH transmission equipment available. (Further study might be necessary for undefined overhead bytes,etc.) SDH STM-1 optical interface available as an option. 1+1 protected STM-1 optical interface for Multiplex Section Protection (MSP). Section overhead (SOH) bits insertion/extraction at both terminal and repeater stations, the same as for SDH optical fiber transmission systems. High power amplifier using GaAs Field Effect Transistor (GaAs FET)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-1
UMN Low power consumption of the RF High Power Amplifier using IF pre-distortion linearity compensation. Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is available as standard configuration. Low noise amplifier using High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT) with a noise figure of 1.5 dB (typical) for 4-6 GHz band. High spectral efficiency of 8.5 bits/sec/Hz using 64 QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (64 QAM MLCM) and 11.4 bits/sec/Hz using 128 QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (128 QAM MLCM) for cochannel operation. High efficiency error correction using Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM). Super high density packaging: Eight (8) complete SDH radio system including Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) are mounted in one ETSI rack (2200600300 mm). Space diversity reception is available as a standard function (by software-based). In-Phase (IP) combiner is used. Adaptive demodulator with fully digital linear transversal equalizer (TVE) with decision feedback equalizer (DFE). Errorless protection switching with early warning detection on fading. Radio user channel (RUC) for a maximum of 2 channels using RFCOH. Signal interfaces are available for both VF and 64 kb/s signal. 64 kb/s signal interface complies with ITU-T recommendation G.703 for co-directional or contra-directional interface. One user channel using F1 byte of SOH per STM-1 is also available. Two 2 Mb/s wayside traffic channels using SOH and RFCOH are available. Event management facility: Alarms and status of the equipment is reported by the SEMF (Synchronous Equipment Management Function) using the Data Communication Channel (DCC)
1-2
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Performance management facility: Traffic performance of each hop and of each end-to-end can be monitored on each RF channel. Monitoring items are BBE (Background Block Error), BBER (Background Block Error Ratio), ES(Errored Seconds), ESR(Errored Second Ratio), SES (Severely Error Seconds), SESR (Severely Error Second Ratio), UAS (UnAvailable Seconds) and OFS (Out of Frame Second), number of pointer change and number of MSP and RPS switching. Configuration management facility: NE configuration is retrieved by the network management terminal and items such as NE ID, and alarm thresholds can be set as provisioning. Resource management facility: Physical inventory such as unit name, can be read by the SEMF. Security management: Several maintenance levels are provided to avoid malfunction. LCT is the local terminal for network element (NE) windows NT based. Software download (SWDL) facility: Firmware used for SRT 1F operation can be remotely downloaded from the network management terminal. Repeater hardware configuration: Repeater stations and terminals have the same configuration.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-3
UMN
SDH MUX LTE
SDH MUX ADM
SDH Radio 1+N MS Mode
SDH Radio 1+N MS Mode
SDH MUX LTE
Tributary
Tributary
Tributary
MS
MS
MS
MS
Note: MS : Multiplex Section RS : Regenerator Section
LTE : Line Terminal Equipment ADM : Add Drop Multiplexer
Network feature : Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) with Section Adaption (SA). Figure 1.1 - Linear Configuration
SDH MUX LTE
SDH MUX ADM SDH Radio 1+N or 0+1 SDH Radio 1+N or 0+1 MS Mode
SDH MUX LTE
Tributary
Tributary
MS Mode
Tributary
MS
MS
MS
MS
Network feature : Network protection switching with media diversity Figure 1.2 - Media Diversity Configuration
1-4
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
MS
Tributary
SDH MUX ADM
MS
SDH MUX ADM
SDH MUX ADM
Tributary
SDH Radio 1+N or 0+1 SDH Radio 1+N or 0+1 MS Mode
Tributary
MS
MS Mode
MS
MS
Network feature : Network protection switching with ring operation Figure 1.3 - Standard Ring Configuration
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-5
UMN
1.2
1.2.1
SRT 1F Equipment Details

Ordering Guide
Assembling an SRT 1F rack means having to select the proper equipment from the ordering guide. Please contact Siemenss Sales and Marketing dept. for the current ordering guide. Figure 1.4 shows the configuration of an (N+1) SRT 1F terminal equipment.
SRT 1F Terminal Equipment Rack
: ETSI Rack x 1
BRU MSTU SCSU
: RF Branching Network Unit Shelf x 1

RF Branching Network Circuit x (Main CHs + Prot)
: Main Signal Transmission Unit x (Main CHs + Prot) : Supervisory, Control, & Switching Unit Subrack x 1 SV BSW TCU HK ECU OCC INTF : Supervisory Unit x x1 1 : Base-Band Switch Unit x (Main CHs) : Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option) : Housekeeping Unit (option) x 2 max. : Embedded Communication Unit (option) x 2 max. : Occasional traffic Interface Unit (option) x 1
BBIU
: Base-Band Interface Unit Subrack, optional for Optical Interface BBC : Base-Band Control Unit x 1
For usage of MSP x (2 Main CHs)
OPT INTF : Optical Interface Unit x (Main CHs) MSP SW : Multiplex Section Protection SW Unit for OPT INTF
x (Main CHs)
Figure 1.4 - (N+1, N = max. 7) SRT 1F Terminal Radio Equipment, Alternated operation
1-6
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Figure 1.5 shows the configuration of an SRT 1F terminal radio equipment operating in the 2(N+1) co-channel operation mode. One rack is used for vertical polarization, another for horizontal polarization.
SRT 1F Terminal Equipment Rack
: ETSI Rack x 2
BRU MSTU SCSU
: RF Branching Network Unit Shelf x 2

RF Branching Network Circuit x (Main CHs + Prot) x 2
: Main Signal Transmission Unit x (Main CHs + Prot) x 2 : Supervisory, Control, & Switching Unit x 2 SV BSW TCU : Supervisory Unit x x1 1 : Base-Band Switch Unit x (Main CHs) : Timing Control Unit x 1 ( + 1 as option)
BSW INTF : BSW Interface x 1 for RPS Group 2 HK ECU OCC INTF BBIU : Housekeeping Unit x 2 max. : Embedded Communication Unit(option) x 2 max. : Occasional traffic Interface Unit(option) x 2 max.
: Base-Band Interface Unit (option) x 2 BBC : Base-Band Control Unit x 2

For usage of MSP x (2 Main CHs)
OPT INTF : Optical Interface Unit x (Main CHs) MSP SW : Multiplex Section Protection SW Unit for OPT INTF
x (Main CHs)
Figure 1.5 - 2 x (N+1, N = max. 7) SRT 1F Terminal Radio Equipment, Co-channel operation
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-7
UMN
1.2.2
BRU (Branching Network Unit)

To define the BRU, the following requirements must be detailed: i) ii) iii) iv) v) Operating frequency band Assigned RF channel number and frequency System configuration (1+0, 1+1, 2+1,........., 7+1) Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation With SD (Space Diversity) or without SD
1.2.3
MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit)

To define the MSTU, the following requirements must be detailed: i) ii) iii) Operating frequency band Assigned RF channel number and frequency Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation
Note: SD receiver circuit is equipped as a standard circuit on the SRT 1F receiver.
1.2.4
SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit)

To define the SCSU, the following requirements must be detailed: i) ii) iii) iv) RPS system configuration: Number of operating RF channels Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation Required optional unit name, such as INTF, and its quantity. ECU, HK, TCU, OCC
Sub-module of SV unit for RUC (VF, Digital interface or none)
1-8
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.2.5
BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit)

To define the BBIU, the following requirements must be detailed: i) ii) iii) RPS system configuration: Number of operating RF channels Operating mode: alternated operation or co-channel operation Requirement for MSP function.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-9
UMN
1.2.6 1.2.7
General Specifications General Information

Table 1.1 - General Specifications
Description
Modulation
64 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM) for 4/5/U6/11 GHz band 128 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM) for U4/L6/7/L8/13 GHz band
Capacity
Alternated operation One (1) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency Co-channel operation Two (2) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency Auxiliary signal Wayside traffic (2.048 Mb/s) Maximum 2 channels per STM-1 by using RFCOH and SOH. Maximum 2N channels for N+1 alternated operation or Maximum 2 x 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation Radio User Channel (64 kb/s) Maximum 2 channels per system using RFCOH for N+1 Maximum 2 channels for N+1 alternated operation or Maximum 2 x 2 channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation User Channel (SOH, 64 kb/s) One (1) channel per STM-1 using SOH Maximum N channels for N+1 alternated operation or Maximum 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) co-channel operation
Repeating Method Overhead Byte Access
Regenerative Same insertion/extraction method as for SDH fibre optic transmission system for terminal and repeater station RS Section (Note-1) A1, A2, C1, B1, E1, F1, D1D3 byte MS Section (Note-2) B2, K1, K2, D4D12 and E2, M1 and S1 byte.
Hypothetical Reference Digital Path (HRDP)
In accordance with the latest ITU-R recommendation
1-10
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.2.8
Transmitter (TX)
Table 1.2 - Transmitter section
Description
Output power
+32/29 dBm1 dB for 4-L8GHz band +29 dBm1 dB for 11GHz band +27 dBm1 dB for 13GHz band measured at MSTU unit output Linearizer circuit is employed to maintain optimum linearity RF band oscillation With PLL Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable Coverage of upper or lower half of the corresponding band (quarter band for 11 and 13GHz). Within 10 ppm For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output < 60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz < 30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz 1st IF: 70 MHz 2nd IF: 844 MHz Signal level: 10 dBm nominal Variation: 1 dB Impedance: Return loss: 75 ohm unbalanced > 20 dB/ 70 MHz 13 MHz for 64 QAM > 20 dB/ 70 MHz 11 MHz for 128 QAM
Linearity compensation Local carrier
Local Frequency stability Spurious emission
IF IF input (Test In)
RF filter
Chebycheff type 3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 64 QAM 30 MHz for 128 QAM
ATPC
Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) is standard. Power control level: 10 dB Response time: 100 ms Control initiation: Received signal threshold detection 64 MLCM: Figure 1.6 128 MLCM: Figure 1.7 128 MLCM: Figure 1.8
Transmitted output spectrum
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-11
UMN
+1 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 100 24MHz -35dB 14MHz +1dB 19.5MHz -10dB
39.5MHz -65dB
55MHz -95dB
RF frequency (MHz)
Figure 1.6 Transmitter output spectrum
(64QAM system, 40 MHz spacing)

(Exclude emissions which result from the modulation process)
1-12
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
+2 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 -110 0 5 10 15 20 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 32MHz -85dB 40MHz -95dB 34MHz -65dB 60MHz -105dB 22MHz -45dB 17MHz -32dB 12MHz +2dB 14.5MHz -6dB
18MHz -32dB
RF freque nc y (MHz)
Figure 1.7 Transmitter output spectrum (128QAM system, 29 / 29.65 MHz spacing) (Exclude emissions which result from the modulation process)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-13
UMN
+1 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 0 5 10 15 20 25 29.5MHz -65dB 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 20MHz -35dB 13MHz +1dB 21MHz -35dB
RF frequency (MHz)
Figure 1.8 Transmitter output spectrum (128QAM system, 28 MHz spacing) (Exclude emissions which result from the modulation process)
1-14
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.2.9
Receiver (RX)
Table 1.3 - Receiver section
Description
Noise figure (Note 1)
1.5 dB typical 2.0 dB guaranteed 2.0 dB typical 2.5 dB guaranteed 2.5 dB typical 3.0 dB guaranteed 4.0 dB typical 4.5 dB guaranteed
(for 4 ~ 6 GHz band) (for 4 ~ 6 GHz band (for 7 ~ 8 GHz band) (for 7 ~ 8 GHz band) (for 11 GHz band) (for 11 GHz band) (for 13 GHz band) (for 13 GHz band)
Note 1: Noise figure is measured at the MSTU unit input on both the main and SD receiver, independently, and at maximum IF amplifier gain. Local carrier RF band oscillation with PLL Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable Half band coverage on lower or upper half of the corresponding band (quarter band for 11 and 13 GHz band). For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output < 60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz < 30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz Within 10 ppm (11 GHz) More than 100 dB with RX BPF measured at the MSTU output when the image and main signal levels are equal, and with unmodulated carrier. 32 to 55 dBm Maximum level: ) Minimum level: 17 dBm 74.5 dBm for 64QAM 72.0 dBm for 128QAM
Spurious emission
Local Frequency stability Image rejection Normal received power Received input range (for BER at 1 x 10
3
AGC dynamic range IF IF output (70 MHz) (Test Out)
17 to 77 dBm measured at MSTU input 1st IF: 70MHz 2nd IF: 844MHz Signal level: 10 dBm nominal, +l dB/2 dB variation for 17 to 77 dBm modulated RX input Impedance : 75 ohm unbalanced 13 MHz for 64 QAM 11 MHz for 128 QAM Return loss : > 20 dB/ 70 MHz
Measured at the MSTU unit monitoring point. RF filter Chebycheff type 3 dB bandwidth: IF filter 40 MHz for 64 QAM 30 MHz for 128 QAM
Butterworth type 3 dB bandwidth 40 MHz
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-15
UMN
1.2.10
Modulator (MOD)
Table 1.4 - Modulation
Description
Modulation
Spectrum shaping
Local carrier Local frequency stability IF
For 40 MHz Channel spacing: 64-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM) For 28/29/29.65/30 MHz Channel spacing: 128-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM) 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM or 25 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution. Crystal oscillator (XO) Within 15 ppm 70 MHz
1.2.11
Demodulator (DEM)
Table 1.5 - Demodulation
Description
Demodulation Spectrum shaping
IF Adaptive equalizer in baseband Adaptive equalizer in IF
Coherent detection/instantaneous decision 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM or 25 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution. 70 MHz 10-tap linear transversal equalizer (TVE) and 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE) Slope equalizer
1-16
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.2.12
Digital Processing
Table 1.6 - Digital Processing
Description
SDH Electrical interface
CMI-to-unipolar conversion Unipolar-to-CMI conversion Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame Section Adaptation (change the pointer) Scrambler/descrambler Addition/drop of section Overhead bit (1) Framing bit (A1, A2) (2) Regenerator section party (B1) (3) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3) (4) Regenerator section orderwire (E1) (5) User channel (F1) (6) Multiplex section Parity (B2) (7) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12) (8) Multiplex section orderwire (E2) (9) AIS, FERF (K1, K2) (10) Section trace (J0) (11) Far End Block Error (M1) (12) Synchronization status byte (S1)
SDH optical interface
Optical-to-electrical conversion Electrical-to-optical conversion Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame Section Adaptation (change the pointer) Scrambler/descrambler Addition/drop of section Overhead byte (1) Framing bit (A1, A2) (2) Regenerator section parity (B1) (3) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3) (4) Regenerator section orderwire (E1) (5) User channel (F1) (6) Multiplex section Parity (B2) (7) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12) (8) Multiplex section orderwire (E2) (9) MSP CONT (K1, K2) (10) Section trace (J0) (11) Far End Block Error (M1) (12) Synchronization status byte (S1)
FERF = Far End Receive Failure MSP = Multiplex Section Protection
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-17
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Table 1.6 - Digital Processing (continued)

Description
UMN
For Radio
SDH frame to Radio frame conversion Radio frame complementary Overhead (RFCOH) insertion and detection (1) Route ID (2) Radio protection switch (RPS) initiator (3) Digital service channel (4) RPS control signal (5) Far end control signal (6) Way side traffic (7) ATPC Control signal
Scrambling Route ID
2151 patterns 16 addresses pre-settable
ATPC = Automatic Transmit Power Control
1-18
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.2.13
Overall
Table 1.7 Overall Description
Up-fade BER Down-fade BER
BER = 103 at RSL of 17 dBm measured at MSTU input For 64 QAM MLCM (Figure 1.9): BER = 103 at RSL of 76.5 dBm typical BER = 103 at RSL of 74.5 dBm guaranteed BER = 106 at RSL of 73.5 dBm typical BER = 106 at RSL of 70.5 dBm guaranteed Measured at MSTU input For 128 QAM MLCM (Figure 1.10): BER = 103 at RSL of 74.0 dBm typical BER = 103 at RSL of 72.0 dBm guaranteed BER = 106 at RSL of 71.0 dBm typical BER = 106 at RSL of 68.0 dBm guaranteed Measured at MSTU input Note 1 : Space Diversity improves RSL by 2 dB. Note 2 : RSL is 1.0 dB higher for 11 GHz and 2.5 dB higher for 13 GHz. Note 3 : Down-fade BER at point B is as follows. 64QAM Figure 1.11 128QAM CC Figure 1.12 128QAM AP (7/13GHz) Figure 1.13
Residual BER
BER < Typical:1013 /hop/day at normal receiving condition Guaranteed:1012 /hop/day at normal receiving condition
RSL = Receive Signal Level
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-19
UMN
BER=10-3 at RSL=-74.5 dBm (Guaranteed) 10

-3
-76.5 dBm
Typical curve
BER
-73.5 dBm BER=10-6 at RSL=-70.5 dBm (Guaranteed)
10
-6
-78
76
74
-72
-70
-68
[dBm]
Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point A (MSTU input) Figure 1.9 BER vs RSL (64 QAM system) (Down-fade) SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-20
UMN
BER=10-3 at RSL=-72 dBm (Guaranteed) 10-3 -74.0 dBm
Typical curve BER
-71.0 dBm BER=10 at RSL=-68 dBm (Guaranteed) 10-6

-6
-76
-74
-72
-70
-68
-66
[dBm]
Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point A (MSTU input) Figure 1.10 BER vs RSL (128 QAM system) (Down-fade) SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-21
10 -2
UMN
RSL - BER Mask at point B (64QAM CC)
10 -3
11G
U6G
5G
10
-4
at A
4G
10 -5
10 -6
ETSI
10
-7
ETSI 11G
10
-8
10 -9 10 -10 10 -11 -80 10
11
12
13
14
-70 15 16 RSL (dBm)
17
18
19
-60 20
Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point B Figure 1.11 BER vs RSL (64 QAM system)
(Down-fade)
1-22
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
10 -2
RSL - BER Mask at point B (128QAM CC)
10 -3
U4G
10 -4
L6G
10 -5
L8G
at A
10
-6
ETSI
10 -7
10
-8
10 -9 10 -10 10 -11 -80 10
11
12
13
14
-70 15 16 RSL (dBm)
17
18
19
-60 20
Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point B Figure 1.12 BER vs RSL (128 QAM system) (Down-fade)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-23
10 -2 RSL - BER Mask at point B (128QAM AP)
UMN
10 -3
L7G
10 -4
U7G
13G
10
-5
at A
10
-6
ETSI
10 -7
ETSI 13G
10
-8
10 -9 10 -10 10 -11 -80 10
11
12
13
14
-70 15 16 RSL (dBm)
17
18
19
-60 20
Receive Signal Level (RSL) at point B Figure 1.13 BER vs RSL (128 QAM system) (Down-fade)
1-24
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.2.14
RF Interference
Table 1.8 - RF Interference
Description
Co-channel
BER = 103 at C/I = 22 dB for 64 QAM MLCM and 25 dB for 128 QAM MLCM measured at duplexer input and RSL of 50 dBm BER = 103 at C/I = 33 dB for 64 QAM MLCM and 30 dB for 128 QAM MLCM measured at duplexer input and RSL of 50 dBm C/N degradation at BER = 103 : < 1 dB measured at duplexer input and Inter-Port Isolation (IPI) of 40 dB Improvement factor using XPIC for co-channel operation = 18 dB measured at BER = 103 interference curve
Adjacent channel
Innermost channel XPIC
The following is the RF waveguide interface to/from the antenna system;
Frequency band
Flange (IEC standard)
4 GHz band 5 GHz band L6 GHz band 7 GHz U6 GHz band L8 GHz band 11 GHz band 13 GHz band
UDR 40 UDR 48 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 84 UDR 100 UDR 120
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-25
UMN
1.2.15
Countermeasures to Fading
Table 1.9 - Countermeasures to Fading
Description
SD SD DADE Method
In Phase combiner in IF stage LO endless phase shifter Two types are available; Compensation with RF feeder length (equivalent to 25 m), or Compensation with delay adjuster at IF (equivalent to 100 ns). SD DADE is adjusted through the delay line on the MSTU unit.
Adaptive Equalizer
Adaptive time domain equalizer in baseband 20 tap full digital type (a) 10-tap transversal equalizer (TVE) (b) 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE) Adaptive frequency domain equalizer in IF (a) Slope equalizer (SLP EQL)
XPIC
Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) is inside the Demodulator module (optionally configure for co-channel operation only) Multi-Level Coded Modulation(MLCM) Coding gain for 64QAM MLCM: 2.0 dB at BER=103 3.5 dB at BER=106
FEC
Coding gain for 128QAM MLCM: 2.0 dB at BER=103 3.7 dB at BER=106 ATPC ATPC range: 10 dB Control speed: 100 dB/sec
1-26
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.2.16
1.2.16.1
Signal Interface for STM-1 System

Base Band Signal Interface The Base Band Signal interface is in accordance with ITU-T G.957 and G.703 Recs.
1.2.16.2
Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface
Table 1.10 - Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface (OPT INTF unit)
Bit Rate Unit Name Application code (ITU-T G.957) Typical hop Operation wavelength range (nm) Transmitter at reference point S: Source type * Spectral characteristics: Maximum RMS width (nm) Maximum 20 dB width (nm) Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB) Mean launched power: Maximum(dBm) Minimum (dBm) Mi Bit rate minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical path between S & R: Attenuation range (dB) Maximum dispersion (ps/nm) Optical path between S and R: Attenuation range Maximum dispersion (ps/nm) Minimum optical return loss of cable point at S, including and connectors (dB) Maximum discrete reflectance between S and R Receiving at reference point R Minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload Maximum optical path penalty (including chirp penalty and dispersion penalty (dB) Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R (dB) Connector Used * Note : MLM = Multi-Longitudinal Mode SLM = Single-Longitudinal Mode 28 8 1 NA SC type or FC type 34 10 1 NA 8 15 8.2 012 96 0-12 96 NA NA 0 5 10 1028 N/A 10-28 186 NA NA SDH level 1 OPT INTF 1 (S-1.1) 0-15 Km 1260-1360 MLM 7.7 155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm OPT INTF 2 (L-1.1) 15-40 Km 1280-1335 MLM 4.0
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-27
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.2.16.3 Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface
UMN
Table 1.11 - Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface (BSW unit)
Bit rate Code format Pulse mask Impedance Return loss Input cable length Coaxial cable Connector used 155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm Coded Mark Inversion (CMI) In accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.703 75-ohm nominal, unbalanced > 15 dB / 8~240 MHz, measured at base band input port The attenuation of the coaxial cable pair should be assumed to follow an approximately root f law and to have a maximum insertion loss of 12.7 dB at a frequency of 78 MHz. 2.5C-QEW or equivalent 27CP coaxial connector is standard. Other connectors are available at customer's request.
1.2.16.4
Jitter Jitter tolerance The SRT 1F radio equipment tolerates the input jitter applied according to ITU-T Rec. G.958 with Type A specified on Table 2. Jitter transfer The SRT 1F radio equipment meets the jitter transfer specification given in ITU-T Rec. G.958 Figure 6.2 with the jitter transfer parameter specified for Type B in Table 1/G.958 when sinusoidal jitter up to the mask level in Figure 6.3/G.958 with the jitter tolerance parameter specified for Type A in Table 2/G.958 is applied at the STM-1 input.
1.2.16.5
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Terminal When the Base Band signal (optical/electrical) or radio signal from the optical equipment or radio equipment is lost, the SRT 1F generates a AU- AIS (MS mode) or a MS-AIS (RS mode) to the next equipment When the AU-AIS is detected from Base Band or radio signal, the SRT 1F transfer the AU-AIS to the next equipment after SOH processing. When MS-AIS is detected from Base Band or radio signal, the SRT 1F transfers MS-AIS to the next equipment after RSOH processing (in case of RS operation), and transfers AU-AIS to the next equipment after RSOH and MSOH processing (in case of MS operation).
1-28
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN Repeater
When frame or signal loss is detected, the SRT 1F generates MS-AIS to the next equipment 1.2.16.6 BSI Transmission Transparent transmission (BSI transmission). The property of a binary transmission channel, telecommunication circuit or connection, that permits all sequences of binary signal elements to be conveyed over it at its specified bit rate, without change to the value of any signal elements.
1.2.17
1.2.17.1
Auxiliary Signal Interface

Radio User Channel (RUC) Table 1.12 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (RUC)
Transmission Bit rate Interface VF interface
Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH bits 64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony) per system Combination of VF and 64 kbit/s available by mounting optional sub-PCB module on the SV units. Input level : 16 dBr nominal (16 to-0.5 dBr, 0.5 step) Output level: +7 dBr nominal (8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step) Voice maximum level: 3 dBmo No. of CH Maximum 2 CH In accordance with ITU-T G.712 In accordance with ITU-T G.712 Amplitude response: Signal-to-distortion: Impedance 600- balanced
Digital interface Connector used
Interface: Co-directional or contra-directional Multi-pin connector
1.2.17.2
Way Side (WS) Table 1.13 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (WS)
Capacity Transmission
2048 kbit/s x 2 per STM-1 Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH and/or SOH bits One wayside traffic is transferred through RFCOH bits, the other is through undefined bytes in SOH
Digital interface Connector used
In accordance with ITU-T G.703 Rec. Multi-pin connector for 120 balanced Coaxial connector, 27CP for 75 unbalanced
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-29
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.2.17.3 Order Wire (OW) Table 1.14 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (OW)
Transmission Bit rate Interface Interface level Bit insertion/separation to/from E1 and E2 of SOH. 64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony) Express orderwire and omnibus orderwire 2-W for internal telephone set and external use 4-W for branching connector 2W Interface Input level : 0.0 dBr nominal Output level : 2.0 dBr nominal Voice maximum level: 4W Interface Input level : 4 dBr nominal (16 to 0.5 dBr, 0.5 step) Output level : 4 dBr nominal (8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step) Voice maximum level: 3 dBmo 3 dBmo
UMN
1.2.17.4
User Channel (UC) Table 1.15 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (User Channel)
Transmission Bit rate Interface Interface
Bit insertion/separation to/from F1 byte of SOH. 64 kbit/s x 1 (equivalent to 1 CH telephony) per STM-1 64 kbit/s Interface : Co-directional or contra directional Pulse mask: In accordance with ITU-T G.703
Connector used
Multi-pin connector
1-30
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.3
1.3.1
Mechanical Specification
General
Rack has dimension as follows: 2200 mm height 600 mm width 300 mm depth
342.5*1 600 300
BRU
RF Branching Network Unit
MSTU
2200
Main Signal Transmission Unit
SCSU
Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit
BBIU
Base-Band Interface Unit (option)
1 * The dimensions include all protruding parts
Figure 1.14 - Front view of (7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-31
UMN
1.3.2
Rack construction
It consists of: Rack RF Branching network part (BRU block) Shelves with PCB backplane (MSTU/SCSU blocks) Optional shelf with PCB backplane (BBIU blocks) Slide-in-units(SIU)
The following connectors and power supply terminals are on the PCB backplane: Multi-pin and co-axial connectors for data Multi-pin connectors for alarm and status output for housekeeping bits Power supply terminal from power supply system.
The shelves comprise the main signal transmission unit (MSTU), supervisory control and switching unit (SCSU), baseband interface unit (BBIU) and RF branching network unit (BRU). A multi-layer PCB backplane is used for plug-in units. Multi-pin connectors on the backplane have high-reliability features and are provided with facilities which prevent wrong insertion. The BBIU shelf is used only for terminal configuration with optical interface. The RF branching network is housed above the MSTU shelf. The RF branching network consists of RF band pass filters and, circulators for channel separation. The RF branching network and the MSTU units are connected through semi-rigid coaxial cables with SMA coaxial connectors via an MSTU adapter. All units are of the plug-in type hence needing no wiring during the installation and maintenance works. Units have card-pullers for easy card extraction and unit locking. All units can be accessed through front panel.
1.3.3
Inter-Rack Connections
Inter-rack cabling and connections are made on the PCB backplane through multi-pin connectors.
1-32
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.3.4
Rack Layout
Typical rack configurations for terminal and repeater stations are shown in Figure 1.15 and Figure 1.16. The terminal equipment has the following facilities; One BRU Maximum eight (8) MSTUs (8 RF system) per rack One SCSU One optional BBIU for STM-1 Optical interface One BRU Maximum eight (8) MSTUs (8 RF system) per rack One SCSU
The repeater equipment (one-end) has the following facilities;
Vertical (V) and Horizontal (H) polarization
BRU
MSTU
SCSU
BBIU
Figure 1.15 - (7+1) Alternated operation Terminal Station
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-33
UMN
A co-channel operating terminal station (up to 1+7 system) consists of two (2) equipment racks of opposite polarization as shown in Figure 1.16.
V-polarization
H-polarization
BRU
MSTU
SCSU
BBIU
Figure 1.16 - 2 x (7+1) Co-channel operating Terminal Station
1-34
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.3.5
Unit Layout
Figure 1.17 shows the unit layout on the MSTU shelf. Maximum eight (8) MSTU units can be mounted in one MSTU.
Figure 1.17 - Front view of the MSTU shelf Figure 1.18 shows the unit layout on the SCSU. One block can accomodate, one SV unit, one TCU unit, and maximum seven (7) BSW units. In addition to the above units, one back-up TCU unit, two HK units, one OCC INTF unit, and two ECU units can be optionally mounted.
RPS Group 1
RPS Group 2
Figure 1.18 - Front view of the SCSU shelf
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-35
UMN
Figure 1.19 shows the unit layout on the BBIU for STM-1 optical interface. One block can accomodate, a maximum of fifteen (15) OPT INTF units, seven (7) MSP SW units, and one BBC unit.
Figure 1.19 - Front view of the STM-1 optical interface BBIU shelf
1-36
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.4
Environmental Specification
Temperature and Humidity Performance guaranteed within the solid line below
Temperature (C) 45 35
10 0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 95
Relative Humidity (%)
Short term operation
5 to 50C Note : Short term is defined as a period not exceeding 72 consecutive hours or a total of 15 days per year. In this case equipment is operable, but performance is not guaranteed
Storage/shipping
Temperature: 20C to +55C, Humidity: 0% to 95% (@35C) Altitude
Performance guaranteed Storage/shipping
Up to 3,500 meters Up to 15,000 meters
Vibration
In accordance with ETSI
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility Electrostatic discharge IEC 801-2

Radiated emission Level 3 (4 kV direct discharge) without any malfunction Level 4 (8 kV direct discharge) with some degraded performance, but without damage In accordance with CISPR Pub.22 CLASS A, 10m method < 39.5 dB V/m for 30.0 to 230.0 MHz < 46.5 dB V/m for 230.0 to 1000.0 MHz Conducted emission In accordance with CISPR Pub.22 CLASS A < 66 dB V/m for 0.15 to 0.5 MHz (average energy) < 60 dB V/m for 0.5 to 30.0 MHz (average energy) Radiated susceptibility In accordance with IEC 801-3 3 V/m, swept 80 MHz to 1 GHz without any malfunction
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-37
UMN
1.5
1.5.1
Power Requirements
General
All the equipment is DC power supplied with positive ground. DC input voltage, 48V (36 V to 72 V) is available. The power supply circuits of all the equipment provide the following: Over current protection (Secondary) Over voltage protection (Secondary) Surge protection (Primary) : Vp = 2 kV Rise and fall time (Vp/2) : tr = 1.2 sec, tf = 50 sec.
A power supply switch with non-fuse breaker is located on each MSTU, SCSU, and BBIU.
1.5.2
Unit Power Consumption

The power consumption of each unit is shown in Table 1.16 - Power Consumption of each unit.
Table 1.16 - Power Consumption of each unit No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12.
Unit
MSTU without XPIC MSTU with XPIC SV TCU BSW BSW INTF HK (optional unit) ECU (optional unit) OPT INTF (optional unit) PE INTF (optional unit) BBC (optional unit) MSP SW (optional unit)
Pc (W)
170 173 20 10 1.3/9* 1.4 3.2 2 24 27 4.3 0.3
1
Remarks
+ 32 dBm output with SD + 32 dBm output with SD
secondary +5V from MSTU-P secondary +5V from MSTU-P secondary +5V from SV secondary +5V from SV
secondary +5V from OPT INTF
Note1: Under working of protection channel. Note: Unit power consumption includes efficiency of power supply module. (80 %)
1-38
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.6
1.6.1
Frequency Plan and Antenna System

General Information
Table 1.17 shows the ITU-R recommendations for the radio frequency plan. Table 1.17 - ITU-R Recommendations.
Band Recommendation
U4 GHz band 4 GHz band 5 GHz band L6 GHz band U6 GHz band L7 GHz band U7 GHz band L8 GHz band 11 GHz band 13 GHz band
ITU-R Recommendation F.382-6 ITU-R Recommendation F.635-3 ITU-R Recommendation F.1099 Annex-1 ITU-R Recommendation F.383-5 ITU-R Recommendation F.384-5 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-6 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-6 ITU-R Recommendation F.386-4 ITU-R Recommendation F.387-6 ITU-R Recommendation F.497-4
1.6.2
Frequency Plan
The frequency allocation for the Upper 4 GHz band is as follows: 3803.5 to 4203.5 MHz Center frequency 4003.5 MHz Guard band 21 MHz (Lower band and upper band) Center gap 68 MHz 29 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 58 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 213 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 5+1 protection system for alternated 2(5+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency shown in Figure 1.20. operation operation)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-39
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION The frequency allocation for the 4 GHz band is as follows: 3600 to 4200 MHz Center frequency 3900 MHz Guard band 20 MHz (Lower band and upper band) Center gap 80 MHz 40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 320 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 6+1 protection system for alternated 2(6+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.21
UMN
operation)
operation
The frequency allocation for the 5 GHz band is as follows: 4400 to 5000 MHz Center frequency 4700 MHz Guard band 30 MHz (Lower band and upper band) Center gap 60 MHz 40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 300 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 6+1 protection system for alternated 2(6+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.22 operation operation)
The frequency allocation for the Lower 6 GHz band is as follows: 5925 to 6425 MHz Center frequency 6175 MHz Guard band 20.2 MHz (Lower band) and 20.21 MHz (Upper band) Center gap 44.49 MHz 29.65 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 59.30 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 252.04 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for alternated 2(7+1)protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.23 operation operation)
1-40
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
The frequency allocation for the Upper 6 GHz band is as follows: 6430 to 7110 MHz Center frequency 6770 MHz Guard band 30 MHz (Lower band and upper band) Center gap 60 MHz 40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 340 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for alternated 2(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.24 operation operation)
The frequency allocation for the Lower 7 GHz band is as follows: 7125 to 7425 MHz Center frequency 7275 MHz Guard band 10 MHz (Lower band) and 17 MHz (Upper band) Center gap 49 MHz 56 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 161 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 4+1 protection system for alternated operation Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.25
The frequency allocation for the Upper 7 GHz band is as follows: 7425 to 7725 MHz Center frequency 7575 MHz Guard band 17 MHz (Lower band and upper band) Center gap 42 MHz 56 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 154 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 4+1 protection system for alternated operation Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.26
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-41
UMN
The frequency allocation for the Lower 8 GHz band is as follows: 7725 to 8275 MHz Center frequency 8000 MHz Guard band Center gap 103.77 MHz 29.65 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 59.30 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 311.32 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for alternated 2(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.27 operation operation)
The frequency allocation for the Lower 11 GHz band is as follows: 10700 to 11700 MHz Center frequency 11200 MHz Guard band 15 MHz for 12 pair system Center gap 90 MHz for 12 pair system 40 MHz frequency spacing (co-channel 80 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 530 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for alternated 2(7+1) protection system for co-channel operation Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.28 operation operation)
The frequency allocation for the Lower 13 GHz band is as follows: 12750 to 13250 MHz Center frequency 12996 MHz Guard band 15 MHz (Lower band) and 23 MHz (Upper band) Center gap 70 MHz 56 MHz frequency spacing (alternated operation) 266 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing 7+1 protection system for alternated operation Specified RF frequency, shown in Figure 1.29.
1-42
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 1.6.2.1
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6)

Alternated operation
400 MHz 213 MHz 21 MHz 58 MHz 21 MHz
1 V(H) H(V)
68 MHz 29 MHz
Co-channel operation
1 V(H) H(V) 1x
2x
3x
4x
29 MHz
5x
6x
68 MHz
1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
Figure 1.20 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6)
Table 1.18 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-6)

RF CH RF FREQUENCY(MHz) LO FREQUENCY(MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6'
3824.5 3853.5 3882.5 3911.5 3940.5 3969.5 4037.5 4066.5 4095.5 4124.5 4153.5 4182.5
2980.5 3009.5 3038.5 3067.5 3096.5 3125.5 3193.5 3222.5 3251.5 3280.5 3309.5 3338.5
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-43
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.2 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3)
UMN
1 V(H) H(V)
80 MHz 40 MHz
600 MHz 320 MHz 20 MHz 80MHz 20 MHz
1 V(H) H(V) 1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
40 MHz
6x
7x
80 MHz
1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
7x
Figure 1.21 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3)
Table 1.19 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-3)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3620.0 3660.0 3700.0 3740.0 3780.0 3820.0 3860.0 3940.0 3980.0 4020.0 4060.0 4100.0 4140.0 4180.0
2776.0 2816.0 2856.0 2896.0 2936.0 2976.0 3016.0 3096.0 3136.0 3176.0 3216.0 3256.0 3296.0 3336.0
1-44
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 1.6.2.3
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1)
1 V(H) H(V)
60 MHz 40 MHz
600 MHz 300 MHz 30 MHz 80MHz 30 MHz
1 V(H) H(V) 1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
40 MHz
6x
7x
60 MHz
1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
7x
Figure 1.22 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1) Table 1.20 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099 Annex-1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4430.0 4470.0 4510.0 4550.0 4590.0 4630.0 4670.0 4730.0 4770.0 4810.0 4850.0 4890.0 4930.0 4970.0
3586.0 3626.0 3666.0 3706.0 3746.0 3786.0 3826.0 3886.0 3926.0 3966.0 4006.0 4046.0 4086.0 4126.0
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-45
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.6.2.4 L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5)
UMN
500 MHz 252.04 MHz 20.2 MHz 59.3 MHz 20.21 MHz
1 8 V(H) H(V)
1 8
44.49 MHz 29.65 MHz
1 8 V(H) H(V) 1x 8
1 8
2x
3x
4x
5x
29.65 MHz
6x
7x
44.49 MHz
1x 8
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
7x
Figure 1.23 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5) Table 1.21 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 383-5)
RF CH RF FREQUENCY (MHz) LO FREQUENCY (MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
5945.20 5974.85 6004.50 6034.15 6063.80 6093.45 6123.10 6152.75 6197.24 6226.89 6256.54 6286.19 6315.84 6345.49 6375.14 6404.79
5101.20 5130.85 5160.50 5190.15 5219.80 5249.45 5279.10 5308.75 5353.24 5382.89 5412.54 5442.19 5471.84 5501.49 5531.14 5560.79
1-46
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 1.6.2.5
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5)
1 8 V(H) H(V)
1 8
60 MHz 40 MHz
1 8 V(H) H(V) 1x 8
1 8
2x
3x
4x
5x
40 MHz
6x
7x
60 MHz
1x 8
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
7x
Figure 1.24 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5) Table 1.22 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 384-5)
RF CH RF Frequency (MHz) LO Frequency MHz)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6460.0 6500.0 6540.0 6580.0 6620.0 6660.0 6700.0 6740.0 6800.0 6840.0 6880.0 6920.0 6960.0 7000.0 7040.0 7080.0
5616.0 5656.0 5696.0 5736.0 5776.0 5816.0 5856.0 5896.0 5956.0 5996.0 6036.0 6076.0 6116.0 6156.0 6196.0 6236.0
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-47

300 MHz 161 MHz 10 MHz 56 MHz 17MHz
UMN
1 V(H) H(V)
49 MHz 28 MHz
Figure 1.25 - L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)
Table 1.23 - L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
7135 7163 7191 7219 7247 7296 7324 7352 7380 7408
6291 6319 6347 6375 6403 6452 6480 6508 6536 6564
1-48
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 1.6.2.7
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)

1 V(H) H(V)
42 MHz 28 MHz
Figure 1.26 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6) Table 1.24 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 385-6)
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
7442 7470 7498 7526 7554 7596 7624 7652 7680 7708
6598 6626 6654 6682 6710 6752 6780 6808 6836 6864
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-49
UMN
1 V(H) H(V)
103.77 MHz 29.65 MHz
550 MHz 311.32 MHz 22.7 MHz 59.3 MHz 8.43MHz
1 V(H) H(V) 1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
7x
8x
103.77 MHz
1x
2x
3x
4x
5x
6x
7x
8x
29.65 MHz
Figure 1.27 - L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 386-4) Table 1.25 - L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 386-4)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7747.70 7777.35 7807.00 7836.65 7866.30 7895.95 7925.60 7955.25 8059.02 8088.67 8118.32 8147.97 8177.62 8207.27 8236.92 8266.57
6903.70 6933.35 6963.00 6992.65 7022.30 7051.95 7081.60 7111.25 7215.02 7244.67 7274.32 7303.97 7333.62 7363.27 7392.92 7422.57
1-50
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 1.6.2.9
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6)
1 V(H) H(V)
10
11
12
10
11
12
90 MHz 40 MHz
1 V(H) H(V) 1x
10
11
12
10
11
12
2x
3x
4x
10x
40 MHz
11x
12x
90 MHz
1x
2x
3x
4x
10x
11x
12x
Figure 1.28 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6) Table 1.26 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
10715.0 10755.0 10795.0 10835.0 10875.0 10915.0 10955.0 10995.0 11035.0 11075.0 11115.0 11155.0
9871.0 9911.0 9951.0 9991.0 10031.0 10071.0 10111.0 10151.0 10191.0 10231.0 10271.0 10311.0
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-51
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Table 1.27 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-6) (Continued)
UMN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
11245.0 11285.0 11325.0 11365.0 11405.0 11445.0 11485.0 11525.0 11565.0 11605.0 11645.0 11685.0
10401.0 10441.0 10481.0 10521.0 10561.0 10601.0 10641.0 10681.0 10721.0 10761.0 10801.0 10841.0
1-52
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
1.6.3
13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4)
500MHz 266 MHz 15 MHz 56 MHz 23 MHz
1 V(H) H(V)
70 MHz 28 MHz
Figure 1.29 - 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4) Table 1.28 - 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-4)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12765 12793 12821 12849 12877 12905 12933 12961 13031 13059 13087 13115 13143 13171 13199 13227
11921 11949 11977 12005 12033 12061 12089 12117 12187 12215 12243 12271 12299 12327 12355 12383
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-53
UMN
1.6.4
RF Branching Network
The RF branching network for alternate operation is shown in Figure 1.30 to Figure 1.31. Figure 1.30 shows (7+1) BRU with SD for alternated operation using a dual polarization antenna. When expansion of this system is requested, co-channel operation will be applied. Figure 1.31 shows 2(7+1) BRU with SD for co-channel operation.
1-54
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Vertical or Horizontal polarization V-TRANSMIT SIDE V-RECEIVE SIDE
V or H H or V
MAIN ANT
ch-1
MTSU ch-1 (Transmitter)
ch-3
DUP
MTSU ch-3 (Transmitter) MTSU ch-3 (MN receiver)
ch-3
ch-1 BEF
MTSU ch-1 (MN receiver)
BPF CIR BPF ch-5 ch-7
MTSU ch-1 (SD receiver)
BEF
MTSU ch-5
(SD receiver)
BPF CIR BPF
BPF CIR BPF
V or H
Horizontal or Vertical polarization H-TRANSMIT SIDE H-RECEIVE SIDE
H or V
SD ANT
ch-4
MTSU ch-4 (Transmitter) MTSU ch-8 (Transmitter)
ch-2
DUP
MTSU ch-2 (Transmitter) MTSU ch-6 (Transmitter) MTSU ch-2 (MN receiver) MTSU ch-6 (MN receiver)
ch-2
ch-4
MTSU ch-4 (MN receiver) MTSU ch-8 (MN receiver)
BPF CIR BPF ch-8 BEF ch-6
BPF CIR BPF
BPF CIR BPF
BRU
Figure 1.30 - (7+1) BRU for alternated operation
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
1-55
Vertical or Horizontal polarization
UMN
V or H H or V
ch-1
ch-3
DUP
MTSU ch-3 (Transm itter) MTSU ch-3 (MN receiver)
ch-3
ch-1 BEF
MAIN ANT
MTSU ch-2 (Transmitter) MTSU ch-5 (Transmitter) MTSU ch-8 (Transmitter)
MTSU ch-4 (Transm itter) MTSU ch-7 (Transm itter) MTSU ch-6 (Transm itter)
MTSU ch-2 (MN receiver) MTSU ch-5 (MN receiver) MTSU ch-6 (MN receiver)
BPF CIR BPF ch-5 ch-7 BEF
MTSU ch-4 (MN receiver) MTSU ch-7 (MN receiver) MTSU ch-8 (MN receiver)
BPF CIR BPF
BPF CIR BPF
ch-1
ch-3
MTSU ch-3 (SD receiver) MTSU ch-5 (SD receiver)
ch-5
ch-7
BEF
BPF CIR BPF
BPF CIR BPF
V or H
BRU-1
Horizontal or Vertical polarization
H or V
SD ANT
ch-1
ch-3
DUP
MTSU ch-3 (Transm itter) MTSU ch-3 (MN receiver)
ch-3
ch-1 BEF
MTSU ch-4 (Transm itter)
BPF CIR BPF ch-5 ch-7 BEF
MTSU ch-5 (Transmitter) MTSU ch-8 (Transmitter)
MTSU ch-7 (Transm itter) MTSU ch-6 (Transm itter)
BPF CIR BPF
BPF CIR BPF
ch-1
ch-3
MTSU ch-3 (SD receiver) MTSU ch-4 (SD receiver) MTSU ch-5 (SD receiver) MTSU ch-6 (SD receiver)
ch-5
ch-7
BEF
BPF CIR BPF
BPF CIR BPF
BRU-2
Figure 1.31 - 2(7+1) BRU with SD for co-channel operation
1-56
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
2.1
2.1.1
Equipment Configurations and Features

SRT 1F System
The SRT 1F radio equipment is designed to transmit STM-1 (155.520 Mb/s) signals. The SRT 1F is equipped with N+1 Radio Protection System (RPS). Possible configurations of the SRT 1F are: Terminal with STM-1 Electrical Interface (SE INTF). Terminal with STM-1 Optical Interface with Multiplex Section Protection (OPT INTF with MSP)). Terminal with STM-1 Optical Interface without Multiplex Section Protection (OPT INTF without MSP).
The SRT 1F consists of four functional blocks: BRU: Branching Network Unit with RF filters, circulators and a duplexer for RF combining/branching and interface to/from the antenna system. MSTU: Main Signal Transmission Unit with Transmitter (TX), Receiver (RX), Modulator (MOD), Demodulator (DEM) and STM-1 Electrical interface (SE INTF) functions. SCSU: Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit with Supervisory (SV), Bipolar Switch (BSW), Timing Control (TCU), Embedded Communication (ECU) and Housekeeping (HK) functions. BBIU: Base-Band Interface Unit with Baseband Interface for STM-1 Optical. Multiplex Section Protection Switches (MSPSW) are also accommodated in this unit. The BBIU is optional for the Terminal with OPT INTF.
Figure 2.1 shows the standard equipment layout.
2.1.2
Terminal
The SRT 1F consists of Terminal equipment The terminal equipment has full facilities; signal transmission, protection switching and baseband interface.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-1
UMN
BRU
BRU Branching Network Unit
[P]
BB INTF (X/Y) : Figure 2.1 - Standard Equipment Layout (not in scale) OPT INTF (X/Y) for STM-1 Optical Interface with MSP *OPT INTF(X) for STM-1 Optical Interface without MSP
MSTU1 BSW1 TCU X BBC BSW2 TCU Y BB INTF P
[M1]
[M1]
MSTU2 BSW3 BB INTF X BSW4 HK1 BB INTF Y
[M2]
[M2]
MSTU3 BSW5 HK2 MSPSW 1 BB INTF X MSPSW 2 BB INTF Y BSW6
[M3]
[M3]
MSTU4 BSW7 * OCC INTF MSPSW 3 BB INTF X ECU1 MSPSW 4 BB INTF Y
[M4]
[M4]
MSTU5 ECU2 MSPSW 5 BB INTF X MSPSW 6 BB INTF Y
[M5]
[M5]
MSTU6
[M6]
Connection Area
MSTU7
[M7]
MSTU8
MSTU Main Signal Transmission Unit
SCSU Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit
SV
MSPSW 7 BB INTF X BB INTF Y
Connection Area
BBIU (option) BaseBand Interface Unit
BB INTF X
[M6]
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M7]
BB INTF Y
BBIU is optional for the Terminal equipment of the Optical interface
2-2
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Figure 2.2 shows the Terminal equipment configuration. The BBIU is installed for the Terminal with Optical interface, but not for the STM-1 Electrical interface.
BRU MSTU
BRU MSTU
SCSU
SCSU
BBIU
Terminal Equipment with SE INTF
Terminal Equipment with OPT INTF
a)
b)
Figure 2.2 - Equipment Configuration for Terminal
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-3
UMN
2.1.3
Baseband Interface
The SRT 1F has three types of baseband interface: SE INTF: STM-1 Electrical Interface, the basic type of interface. The SRT 1F with SE INTF is composed of BRU, MSTU and SCSU. Figure 2.3 shows the schematic diagram. OPT INTF (with MSP): STM-1 Optical Interface Multiplex Section, the type of interface with optical line protection (MSP). The SRT 1F with OPT INTF (MS) is composed of BRU, MSTU, SCSU and BBIU. Figure 2.4 shows the schematic diagram. OPT INTF (without MSP): STM-1 Optical Interface Regenerator Section, the type of interface without optical line protection. The SRT 1F with OPT INTF (RS) is composed of BRU, MSTU, SCSU and BBIU. Figure 2.5 shows the schematic diagram.
2.1.4
Alternated and Co-channel Operation

The SRT 1F can provide two frequency allocation systems as follows: Alternated operation: An STM-1 signal is transmitted by an RF frequency using single polarization. Co-channel operation: Two STM-1 signals are transmitted simultaneously by an RF frequency using dual polarization. This system is provided as an option to double the spectrum efficiency. The transmission capacity of Way side, User channel and other auxiliary signals will be doubled through this co-channel operation system.
2-4
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Figure 2.3 shows the schematic diagram of STM-1 Electrical Interface Terminal without SD (Space Diversity).
TDP Prot CH STM-1 CMI RDP
USW
MOD TX
DUP BPF
USW
DEM RX
BPF
STM-1 Electrical In/out

Main 1 STM-1 CMI TDP BSW RDP WS R,S UC(F1) USW USW
MSTU
MOD TX
BPF
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
Main 2
STM-1 CMI
TDP BSW RDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
USW
DEM RX
BPF
WS R,S UC(F1)
MSTU
Main 3
STM-1 CMI
TDP BSW RDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
USW
DEM RX
BPF
WS R,S UC(F1) UC(F1) WS R,S To/from Main N RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO STM-1 CMI
MSTU BRU
STM-1 Unipolar
NOTE : BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit
LCT
EXT CLK OUT EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK MON
Figure 2.3 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1 Electrical Interface Terminal

SCSU
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-5
UMN
Figure 2.4 shows the schematic diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal with MSP and without SD. This configuration provides Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) for the optical line interface.
TDP Prot CH STM-1 CMI RDP USW DEM RX BPF USW MOD TX DUP BPF
STM-1 Optical In/out

X Main 1 Y OPT INTF OPT INTF MSP SW STM-1 CMI BSW RDP WS R,S USW TDP USW
MSTU
MOD TX
BPF
DEM RX
BPF
UC(F1)
MSTU
OPT INTF OPT INTF STM-1 CMI BSW RDP WS R,S USW DEM RX
X Main 2 Y
MSP SW
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
BPF
UC(F1)
MSTU
OPT INTF OPT INTF STM-1 CMI BSW RDP WS R,S USW DEM RX
X Main 3 Y
MSP SW
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
BPF
UC(F1)
MSTU BBIU
UC(F1) WS R,S To/from Main N RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO STM-1 CMI STM-1 Unipolar
BRU
NOTE : BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit
LCT
Figure 2.4 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal with MSP
SCSU
2-6
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Figure 2.5 shows the schematic diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal without MSP and without SD.
USW
MOD TX
DUP BPF
USW
DEM RX

Main 1 OPT INTF STM-1 CMI MSP SW WS R,S BSW RDP UC(F1) USW TDP USW
BPF
MSTU
MOD TX
BPF
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
Main 2 OPT INTF STM-1 CMI MSP SW WS R,S BSW RDP UC(F1) USW DEM RX TDP USW MOD TX BPF
BPF
MSTU
Main 3 OPT INTF STM-1 CMI MSP SW WS R,S BSW RDP UC(F1) USW DEM RX TDP USW MOD TX BPF
BPF
MSTU BBIU
UC(F1) WS R,S To/from Main N RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO STM-1 CMI STM-1 Unipolar
BRU
NOTE : BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit
LCT
Figure 2.5 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal without MSP
SCSU
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-7
UMN
2.2
2.2.1
STM-1 Signal Transmission

STM-1 Electrical Signal Interface
SCSU The STM-1 Electrical signal input/output terminals are located on the BSW (Bipolar Switch) front panel on the SCSU (Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit). BBIU Input/output terminals for STM-1 Optical are located on the front panels of the OPT INTF unit of BBIU (Baseband interface unit). The Optical STM-1 is converted to the STM-1 CMI signal and sent to the BSW unit of the SCSU.
2.2.2
Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function)

The MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) is composed of Transmitter (TX), Receiver (RX), Modulator (MOD), Demodulator (DEM) and STM-1 Electrical interface (SE INTF) functions. The Unipolar Switch (USW) for the Radio Protection System (RPS) is also a part of the MSTU. SE INTF The STM-1 CMI signal inputs from the BSW unit of SCSU. The incoming STM-1 CMI signal is converted to eight unipolar signal streams and applied to the Transmit Data Processing (TDP) circuit. TDP The TDP circuit processes drop/insert the Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) to be terminated from the STM-1 data. The AU-Pointer is also re-written. A Unipolar Switch (USW) provides hitless switching for the Radio Protection System. After the USW, the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is applied to the incoming STM-1 signal to compose the Radio Frame. The RFCOH is composed of Radio Frame Alignment, Wayside, Radio Service Channel, RPS Control, Redundancy bit for MLCM and other signals. Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) is provided to perform forward error correction on the data to transmit across the radio section. QAM MOD Module The Radio Frame inputs the QAM Modulator Module (QAM MOD Module). The QAM MOD Module is composed of a spectrum shaping device and a Modulator controller (MOD), the Digital to analog converter (D/A) and the Quadrature Amplitude Modulator (QAM) to generate the QAM signal. The QAM MOD Module output is applied to the Transmit IF (TIF) circuit.
2-8
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN TIF
The incoming QAM signal is converted to the 1st IF (70MHz) signal. st The 1 IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then applied to the Linearizer (LNZ). The LNZ works to compensate the distortion which is caused by the non-linearity of the RF transmit circuit. st nd The 1 IF signal is converted to the 2 IF (844MHz) signal, then applied to the Transmit RF Module (TRF Module). TRF Module The TRF accepts the 2nd IF and converts it to the Radio Frequency (RF) by mixing it with the signal outputting from the Local Oscillator Module (LO Module). The RF signal is amplified through RF amplifiers. The MSTU output level is +29 dBm (+ 27 dBm for 13 GHz). It is controlled by the Automatic Level Control (ALC) which keeps it constant against input signal level, amplifier gain and other ambient factor variations. High power version transmitting +32dBm is available from 4 GHz to 8 GHz. Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) can automatically control the MSTU output power within +29 dBm (HIGH) and +19 dBm (LOW) based on the propagation loss across the radio section. The ATPC automatically changes the MSTU output level back to HIGH when the RX receiving level becomes lower than the specified level. ATPC is an option setting through the LCT. This function is provided to save the power drained by the MSTU and improve possible interference on adjacent frequency channels and opposite polarization. The MSTU output is applied to the Branching Network Unit (BRU), then to the antenna. The spurious emission of the transmitter is suppressed by the BRUs Band-Pass Filter (BPF). LO Module The LO Module is a phase-locked loop oscillator circuit supplying the RF Local signals to the Transmitter and Receiver. The oscillation frequency setting is based on MSTU operation frequency. RRF Module The Receive RF Module (RRF Module) accepts the received RF signal from the antenna through BRU. Receiver selectivity is determined by the BRUs BPF. The received RF signal (standard level : - 35 dBm, AGC dynamic range: - 17 dBm to - 70s dBm) is amplified by a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), nd nd then converted to the 2 IF (844MHz). The 2 IF signal is amplified and applied to the Receive IF (RIF) circuit. RIF The 2nd IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then converted to the st st 1 IF (70MHz). The 1 IF signal is applied to the DEM circuit. The Rx st amplifiers are Automatically Gain Controlled (AGC) to maintain the 1 IF output level constant against the big variation of the RF Rx level at the MSTU input.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-9
UMN
AGC current of Main 1 channel can be monitored through connector CN34 on the SCSU shelf for testing and maintenance service. The Mixer (MIX) converts the 1st IF signal down to the QAM signal and applies it to the QAM Demodulator Modulate (QAM DEM Module). QAM DEM Module The QAM DEM Module is composed of the QAM demodulator the Analog to Digital Converter (A/D), the Demodulator controller (DEM), the spectrum shaping device and the Transversal Equalizer (TVE) with Decision Feedback Equalizer (DFE). The spectrum shaping device shares spectrum shaping function with the QAM MOD Module of the transmitter side. The TVE with DFE equalizes waveform distortion caused by multi-path fading in the baseband time domain. The radio frame baseband clock signal is recovered from the received IF signal by the QAM DEM Module. The output of QAM DEM Module, the radio frame baseband signal and the clock signal, are sent to the Receive Data Processing (RDP) circuit. RDP The first stage of the RDP is the MLCM decoder. Forward error correction consists in checking redundancy bits contained in the radio frame. Radio parity (RP) bits before error correction, part of the MLCM redundancy bits, are detected to monitor the error performance across the radio section from the modulator to demodulator. Bit Error Ratio of RP deterioration (BER-ALM) is one of the automatic USW operation factors. Another automatic operation factor of the USW is frame synchronization loss (LOF) on the radio frame. The RFCOH is extracted to regenerate the STM-1 signal. The RPS function at the receiver end is performed by the USW. The USW can hitless switch in case of manual operation and most of the automatic operation caused by ordinary fading. MSOH and RSOH drop/insert and AU-Pointer rewriting are carried out. The 8 unipolar signal spreams are converted to an STM-1 CMI signal and sent to the BSW unit of the SCSU. The BSW cannot work in hitless, however, it further isolates the channel to be tested or during system failure. Figure 2.6 shows the main signal flow on STM-1 Electrical Interface equipment. This configuration is used as SE INTF terminal equipment.
2-10
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Figure 2.6 shows the main signal flow of the STM-1 Electrical Interface equipment without SD (Space Diversity).
USW
MOD TX
DUP BPF
USW
DEM RX
BPF
STM-1 Electrical In/out

Main 1 STM-1 CMI TDP BSW RDP USW USW
MSTU
MOD TX
BPF
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
Main 2
STM-1 CMI
TDP BSW RDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
Main 3
STM-1 CMI
TDP BSW RDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
USW
DEM RX
BPF
WS R, S UC(F1) UC(F1) WS R,S To/from Main N RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO STM-1 CMI
MSTU BRU
STM-1 Unipolar
NOTE : BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit
LCT
Figure 2.6 - of Main Signal Flow of STM-1 Electrical Interface Terminal
SCSU
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-11
UMN
2.2.3
Space Diversity
As a counter measure to severe propagation path conditions, Space Diversity (SD) reception is provided as standard supply. Enable or disable the SD function is to be set through the LCT. Figure 2.7 shows the diagram of RF/IF section of MSTU applied for SD reception.
From SD Antenna To/from Main Antenna
DUP
MOD MIX IFA LNZ MIX FIL MIX AMP BPF
1st IF LOC
2nd IF
TXPLO EPS MIX AMP RXPL MIX
RF LOC
BPF
DEM
MIX
DELAY EQL
HYB
LNA
BPF
MSTU Prot
IF DADE
MIX
AMP
MIX
LNA
BPF
MOD
MIX
IFA LNZ
MIX
FIL
MIX
AMP
1st IF LOC
2nd IF
TXPLO EPS MIX AMP RXPL MIX
RF LOC
DEM
MIX
DELAY EQL
HYB
LNA
BPF
MSTU Main 1
IF DADE
MIX
AMP
MIX
LNA
BPF
BRU MOD : Modulator IFA : IF Amplifier LNZ : Linearizer MIX : Mixer as Freq. Converter FIL : Filter AMP : RF Amplifier EPS : Endless Phase Shifter LNA : Low Noise Amplifier HYB : Hybrid as IF Combiner IF DADE : Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer (adjustable) DELAY EQL : Delay Equalizer (adjustable) DEM : Demodulator LOC : Local Oscillator TX/RX PLO : Phase Locked Loop Oscillator
Figure 2.7 - Diagram of Space Diversity Reception
2-12
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION The MSTU is equipped with two sets of receiver. One receiver (Main receiver) is connected to the Main antenna (upper) and the other (SD receiver) is connected to the SD antenna (lower). Two receiver outputs are combined together after phase synchronization. Phase synchronization is achieved by controlling the nd 2 IF local carrier to SD receiver through the Endless Phase Shifter (EPS). The combining ratio of two receiver outputs is controlled through algorithms to optimize transmission performance. The SD system can improve the Carrier to Noise Ratio (C/N) up to 2 to 3 dB during the stable propagation condition period, and remarkably reduce the possibility of outage due to multi-path fading.
2.2.4
MSTU Front Panel

Figure 2.8 shows the front panel of MSTU unit. Table 2.1 shows the functions of MSTU front panel Table 2.1 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel
No.
Item
Function
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
FAN FAN PWR POWER ON/OFF TX LO MON 70M IN REF I/O 70M OUT MN 70M OUT SD DADE D-EQL XPIC OUT (master) XPIC IN (slave) INCR DECR ITEM No. LED indicator UNIT/RCI LINE
4 cooling fans for transmitter. Power cable connector for cooling fans DC power supply switch for MSTU unit Monitor terminal for TX local frequency 70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the LCT. 70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of Main/SD antenna reception DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference Delay equalizer for branching network XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation Analog level setting of MSTU (Factory use only) Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use a LCT terminal for maintenance Alarm/status indicator : Normal = green(*), Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking Normal = green(*), Line failure = red on * : Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable via the LCT.
(13)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-13
UMN
FAN (1)
FAN PWR (2)

ON
70M IN REF I/O
(5) (6)
POWER ON/OFF (3)
MN 70M OUT (7) SD
OFF
DADE
(8)
TX F MON (4)
D-EQL (9)
XPIC OUT (10) XPIC IN INCR DECR ITEM No. (11)
Factory use only.

ITEM No. must be 0
for normal operation. (12)
UNIT/RCI (13) LINE
Figure 2.8 - Front Panel of MSTU unit
2-14
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2.2.4.1
Top View of MSTU Adapter RF output/input connectors from/to MSTU unit are located at the top of each MSTU unit. These connectors are mounted on the MSTU plug-in adapter as an intermediate device. Figure 2.9 shows the top view of MSTU adapter. Figure 2.9 - Top View of MSTU
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-15
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION OW/UC/RUC/WS Signal Transmission
UMN
In addition to the main signal (STM-1 signal), the SRT 1F system can also transmit several auxiliary signals. Some signals are accessible for users utilization through the connectors in the Connection area on the SCSU. Some signals are exclusively used by the SRT 1F to control the SRT 1F system itself. This chapter describes auxiliary signals for users utilization as follows: Transmitted by STM-1 SOH (Section Overhead) Two Engineering Orderwires per system One User Channel per STM-1 One Wayside Traffic per STM-1 (see 3.4 Wayside Traffic)
Transmitted by RFCOH (Radio Frame Complementary Overhead) Two User Channels per system One Wayside Traffic per STM-1
2.2.5
Engineering Orderwire (OW)

The SRT 1F provides two engineering orderwires. One is transmitted by E1 byte of RSOH (Regenerator Section OH). The other one is transmitted by E2 byte of MSOH (Multiplex Section OH). Generally, the orderwire from E1 is used as omnibus, and the orderwire from E2 as express. Voice frequency signals of two orderwire from E1 and E2 are independent and have no mutual communication. The orderwires interfacing circuit is the SV unit in the SCSU. The SV unit has two sets of orderwire interface for E1 and E2; 2-wire VF modular socket for telephone set connection and 4-wire VF circuit for the connection to/from other equipment. The SV unit has a common circuit for Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) function and LED/Buzzer for station calling. The RF channel to transmit orderwires is software settable. Orderwires are RPS (USW) protected.
2-16
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
MSTU Prot VF(E1) 2W VF(E2) SV unit in SCSU 4W VF(E2) E2 E1 E2 Software selection E1 E2 MSTU Main 1 E1 E2 E1 MSTU Main 2 MSTU Main N
Telephone set
To/from Other Station
To/from Other Equipment
VF(E1)
Figure 2.10 - Signal Flow of Orderwire
2.2.6
User Channel (UC)

A 64 kb/s User Channel (UC) per RF channel is prepared for users data communication. This user channel is transmitted through byte F1 of the RSOH. The user channel interfacing circuit is the Bipolar Switch (BSW) units in the SCSU. User Channels are RPS (USW and BSW) protected.
In/Out port
MSTU Prot
Prot To/from Other Stations Main 1 Main 2 Main N
64 kb/s Main 1 Main 2 Main N
BSW units in SCSU
Main 1 Main 2 Main N
MSTU Main 1
Figure 2.11 - Signal Flow of User Channel (F1)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-17
UMN
2.2.7
Radio User Channel (RUC)

Two Radio User Channels (RUC) per system are provided to transmit voice frequency signals (VF) or 64 kb/s data for users utilization. The RUCs are transferred by the Radio Frame Complementary OH. Two RUC channels are transmitted by the Main 1 and Protection channel in parallel for duplication. At the receive side, one of the RUC sets is selected VF or 64 kb/s digital interface is selectable through the sub-modules on the SV unit.
In/out port RUC #1, #2 VF/64 kb/s #1 SV unit in SCSU MSTU Main 1 RUC #1, #2 MSTU Prot Prot To/from Other Station Main 1
VF/64 kb/s #2
Figure 2.12 - Radio User Channel Signal Flow
2-18
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2.2.8
Wayside Traffic (WS)

The SRT 1F system is provided to transmit two Wayside Traffics (WS, 2.048 Mb/s each) per STM-1 for local traffic transfer. One of two Wayside traffics (WS SOH) is transmitted by the undefined national usage byte of SOH. Another Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH) is transmitted by the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead. The interface circuit of Wayside traffics (WS SOH and WS RFCOH) is the BSW (Bipolar Switch) unit on the SCSU. Input/output port connectors are located on the front panel of the BSW unit (for 75 ohms unbalance), and in the Connection Area of the SCSU (for 120 ohms balance). The input/output port interface features hardware set. Wayside signals are RPS (USW and BSW) protected.
MSTU Prot Prot
WS (SOH) BSW Main 1 WS (RFCOH) MSTU Main 1 Main 1 To/from Other Station BSW Main 2 WS (RFCOH) MSTU Main 2
WS (SOH) Main 2
WS (SOH) BSW Main N WS (RFCOH) MSTU Main N Main N
Figure 2.13 - Wayside Traffic Signal Flow
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-19
UMN
2.2.9
Digital Communication Channel (DCC)

Digital Communication Channels (DCCs) are provided for the Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) signal transmission. The DCC, is detailed in chapter 2.6.6 Embedded Communication Unit.
2-20
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2.3
OverHead Bit Access for SRT 1F System

The SRT 1F uses three kinds of overhead bit to transfer the signals for system supervise/control and users utilization. In addition to the Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) of STM-1 frame, the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is provided between two MSTUs across a radio section. Figure 2.14 shows access points of MSOH, RSOH and RFCOH.
SDH Radio System
Terminal
Back to back terminal
Terminal
Radio Frame MS MS
Radio Frame MS MS
RFCOH RSOH MSOH
RFCOH RSOH MSOH
RFCOH RSOH MSOH
Figure 2.14
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-21
UMN
2.3.1
MSOH and RSOH

The Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) are compatible with SDH optical fiber systems in accordance with ITU-T G. 707. The MSOH are drop/inserted at the terminal stations of the multiplex section. The RSOH are drop/inserted at the terminal stations of the multiplex/regenerator section. Figure 2.15 shows the STM-1 frame format and overhead bit assignment. Table 2.2 shows the function of MSOH, RSOH, Pointer and Path Overhead (POH).
270 Bytes 9 Bytes
RSOH 9 Rows Pointer MSOH Payload
RSOH Pointer MSOH
A1 B1 D1 H1-1 B2 D4 D7 D10 S1
A1 WS WS H1-2 B2 WS WS WS Z1
A1 WS WS H1-3 B2 WS WS WS Z1
A2 E1 D2 H2-1 K1 D5 D8 D11 Z2
A2 WS H2-2 WS WS WS WS Z2
A2
H2-3 WS WS WS WS M1
J0 F1 D3 H3-1 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2
WS WS
H3-2 WS WS WS WS
WS WS WS H3-3 WS WS WS WS WS
J1 B3 C2 G1 F2 H4 Z3 Z4 Z5
MSOH, RSOH and Pointer

WS
POH
: Wayside traffic transmission by Radio specific usage byte and National usage byte : Reserved for future international standardization
Figure 2.15 - STM-1 Frame Format Construction
2-22
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Table 2.2 - Main Function of Section Overhead

(ITU-T G.707)
Overhead Byte Abbr. Usage Function
SOH
A1, A2
Framing
D1 to D12
Data Communication Channels
J0 E1, E2
Regenerator Section Trace Orderwire
F1 B1
User channel BIP-8
B2
BIP-24
K1, K2 S1 M1 Z1, Z2 H1 to H3
APS channel Synchronous status Far end block error Spare Pointer bit
Pointer
6 bytes are used for STM-1 frame synchronization. The pattern is A1A1A1A2A2A2 to each STM-1 frame, A1 = 11110110, A2 = 00101000 12 bytes are used for Telecommunication Management Network (TMN). D1 to D3 are communication for Regenerator Section. D4 to D12 are communication for Multiplex Section. One byte is unique number assigned to an STM-1 signal for identification in aggregated STM-N level. Two bytes are used for voice frequency transmission as engineering orderwire. E1 are communication for Regenerator Section. E2 are communication for Multiplex Section. One byte is reserved for user purposes. A User Channel (SOH) is to be transmitted. Bit Interleaved Parity 8 One byte is used to monitor the error performance of the Regenerator Section. Bit Interleaved Parity 24 Three bytes are used to monitor the error performance of the Multiplex Section. Two bytes are allocated for Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) switching control. One byte is used for quality control of the synchronous clock signal. One byte is allocated to transmit the block error information to the far end. Four bytes are reserved as spare. Administration Unit (AU) pointer bits are used for Section Adaptation (SA). SS bit Sending side H1 : 00/10/01/11 selectable Y1 (H1#2) : same as H1 Y2 (H1#3) : same as H1 Receiving side H1 : 00/10/01/11 selectable Y1 (H1#2) : XX (no use) Y2 (H1#3) : XX (no use) Note: H1 is set to the same value for both the sending and receiving sides.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-23
UMN
2.3.2
RFCOH
The SRT 1F organizes the Radio Frame for the transmission between two Main Signal Transmit Units (MSTU) across a radio section. The Radio Frame is composed of the STM-1 signal and Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH). The Radio Frame has two types of configuration based on the modulation system, 64 QAM and 128 QAM. 64 QAM : 6 streams at 28.512 Mb/s 128 QAM : 7 streams at 24.192 Mb/s
The Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) transfer two classes of signals and a number of dummy bits. One is exclusively for internal use to monitor/control the SRT 1F system, and the other is for users utilization. Signals for SRT 1F system internal use: FA : Frame Alignment bit to maintain the frame synchronization of radio frame (36 bits = 288 kb/s for 64 QAM, 42 bits = 336 kb/s for 128 QAM ). C1 : Redundancy bit for the Multi Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) level 1 (1184 bits = 9472 kb/s for 64 QAM, 1004 bits = 8032 kb/s for 128 QAM). C2 : Redundancy bit for the Multi Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) level 2. Radio parity for the error performance across radio section before error correction is checked through this signal (296 bits = 2368 kb/s for 64 QAM, 251 bits = 2008 kb/s for 128 QAM). BSCS (RSC*): Baseband Switch Control Signal to control the Radio Protection System (RPS) (32 bits = 256 kb/s). RID1 to RID4 : Route identifier for radio section (4 bits = 32 kb/s). ATPC : Automatic Transmit Power Control signal (6 bits = 56 kb/s) 1BE/X1BE : Transfer bit for 1 Bit Error (2 bits = 16 kb/s). FMS/XFMS : (2 bits = 16 kb/s). Transfer bit for Frequency Measurement
OOS/XOOS : Transfer bit for Out of Service (OOS) (2 bits = 16 kb/s).
Signals for users utilization WSRF : Wayside traffic by RFCOH (264 bits = 2112 kb/s) RUC (RSC*) : Radio User Channel (16 bits = 128 kb/s)
Note: RSC* (Radio Service Channel, 108 bits = 864 kb/s ) is composed of BSCS, RUC, unused bits and stuff bits for redundant transmission by the Main 1 and Protection channel only. Figure 2.16 shows the Radio Frame structure. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-24
UMN
Total 171.072 Mb/s 15.552 Mb/s STM-1 155.520 Mb/s
RFCOH
S O H
Payload
RFCOH (Radio Frame Complementary Overhead) and STM-1 frame are mapped to compose the Radio Frame as below.
3564 bits (28.512 Mb/s) per 6 bits 148 words 1776 bits 6 bits 148 words 1776 bits
S6 to S1
1 Sub-frame
st
2 Sub-frame
nd
S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
Frame Alignment Bits
X2 C2 C1 C1 C1 C1
1st word (12 bits)
X2 C2 C1 C1
X1 X2 C2 C1 C1 C1 C1
83rd word (12 bits)
X1 X2 C2 C1 C1 C1
6 bits
1st to 82nd word (984 bits)
83rd to 148th word (792 bits)
Note: : STM-1 signal (Payload, RSOH, MSOH and Pointer) C1 : Redundancy bit for MLCM level 1 C2 : Redundancy bit for MLCM level 2 X1 : RSC (BSCS, RUC and dummy bits), FMS/XFMS, OOS/XOOS and RID1 to RID4 rd th Transmitted by 83 to 148 word of each sub-frame.
X2 : Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH), 1BE/X1BE and ATP st th Transmitted by 1 to 148 word of each sub-frame Figure 2.16 - Radio Frame Structure of 64 QAM modulation
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-25
UMN
Total 169.344 Mb/s 13.824 Mb/s STM-1 155.520 Mb/s
RFCOH
S O H
Payload
RFCOH (Radio Frame Complementary Overhead) and STM-1 frame are mapped to compose the Radio Frame as below.
3024 bits (24.192 Mb/s) per 6 bits 126 words 1512 bits 6 bits 125 words 1500 bits
S7 to S1
1 Sub-frame
st
2 Sub-frame
nd
1st Sub-frame
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 6 bits
Frame Alignment bits
X2 C2 C1 C1 C1 C1
1st word (12 bits)
X2 C2 C1 C1
X1 X2 C2 C1 C1 C1 C1
37th word (12 bits)
X1 X2 C2 C1 C1 C1
1st to 36th word (432 bits)
37th to 126th word (1080
2nd Sub-frame
S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 6 bits
Frame Alignment bits
X2 C2 C1 C1 C1 C1
1st word (12 bits)
X2 C2 C1 C1
X1 X2 C2 C1 C1 C1 C1
36th word (12 bits)
X1 X2 C2 C1 C1 C1
1st to 35th word (420 bits)
36th to 125th word (1080
Figure 2.17 - Radio Frame Structure of 128 QAM modulation
2-26
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Note: : STM-1 signal (Payload, MSOH, RSOH and Pointer) C1 : Redundancy bit for MLCM level 1 C2 : Redundancy bit for MLCM level 2 X1 : Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH), RSC (BSCS, RUC and dummy bits), FMS/XFMS, OOS/XOOS, RID1 to RID4,1BE/X1BE and ATPC
th th st Transmitted by 37 to 126 word of the 1 sub-frame th th nd and 36 to 125 word of the 2 sub-frame.
X2 : Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH). Transmitted by all words of each sub-frame.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-27
UMN
2.4
Radio Protection Switch System

The SRT 1F is equipped with the Radio Protection Switch system (RPS) to improve signal transmission reliability. Automatic protection switch intervenes in case of equipment failure and degradation of the propagation condition. Manual switching is implemented for testing and maintenance operation purposes.
2.4.1
Outline of Radio Protection Switching

Protection Ratio One protection channel is provided for each switching group. Alternated operation : One group (RPS 1 = Group 1) having 7 + 1 protection Co-channel operation : Two groups (RPS 1 = Group 1 and RPS 2 = Group 2) having 7 + 1 protection each.
Maximum number of main channels is limited by the frequency band being utilized (maximum 7 main channels per group). Switching Device The Radio Protection System has two switch, bipolar switch (BSW) and unipolar switch (USW) stages. Figure 2.18 shows the outline of the Radio Protection System.
Prot Main 1
BB INTF BSW
MSTU (USW) MSTU (USW) MSTU (USW) MSTU (USW)
Prot Main 1
BSW BB INTF
Main 2
BB INTF BSW
Main 2
BSW BB INTF
Main 3
BB INTF BSW
Main 3
BSW BB INTF
To/from Main N Unipolar signal To/from Main N STM-1 CMI signal
: Bipolar signal (CMI) line : Unipolar signal (19.44 Mb/s X 8) line

BB INTF
: Optional BB INTF unit (OPT INTF)
Figure 2.18 - Radio Protection System SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-28
UMN
Switching Section
The switching section of the Radio Protection System consists of two facing SRT 1F equipment. Figure 2.19 shows the RPS switching section.
Terminal A
USW MSTU BB INTF BB INTF BSW USW MSTU USW MSTU
Back to back Terminal B

MSTU USW USW MSTU BSW BSW USW MSTU USW MSTU Unipolar
Terminal C
MSTU USW
MSTU USW
MSTU USW
BSW
BB INTF BB INTF
BSW
MSTU USW
BSW
BSW
MSTU USW
BSW
Unipolar CMI To/from Main N
Unipolar CMI CMI To/from Main N
Unipolar CMI To/from Main N
Switching section A to B
Switching section B to C
Figure 2.19 - Switching Section OW/UC/WS Signal The Radio Protection Switching of Orderwire, User Channel by SOH and Wayside traffic by SOH/RFCOH depends on the operation of STM-1 main signal. Co-channel Operation In case of Co-channel operation, two independent Radio Protection Switching groups (RPS 1 and RPS 2) are configured according to the system requirement. RPS 1 and RPS 2 operate independently, and there is no mutual protection switching between two groups. Human Machine Interface (HMI) The switching status and manual switch operation are supervised through the local terminal, LCT. There is no display/control panel equipped on the SRT 1F. The LCT can supervise/control all SRT 1F equipment (NE = Network Element) within a Digital Communication Channel (DCC) group connecting the local terminal.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-29
UMN
2.4.2
USW and BSW

The Radio Protection System has two switch, bipolar switch (BSW) and unipolar switch (USW) stages. USW (Unipolar Switch) The USW is a part of the digital transmit/receive processor of MSTU. This switch can hitless switch between protection and any of the main channels through automatic baseband DADEing. Protection switching on fade is carried out by this USW. Fading and equipment failure on the MSTU RF/IF stage are detected as BER ALM or F LOSS at the receiving end to initiate automatic RPS operation.
Signal level Direction Initiator :
: :
8 streams of 19.44 Mb/s, Unipolar Uni-directional Auto revertive Loss of frame alignment (F LOSS) Signal degrade (BER ALM) 1 bit error detected (1BE, option setting)
BSW (Bipolar Switch) One BSW unit per main channel is mounted in the SCSU (Supervisory Control & Switching Unit). This switch cannot hitless switch because of the signal level (bipolar) and of the switching device (high-speed mechanical relay). BSW automatic protection switching is mainly determined by equipment failure. Manual protection switching is also a non hitless switching but can safely isolate a specific main channel from traffic transmission, for testing and troubleshooting purposes.

Signal level Direction Initiator :
: :
STM-1, CMI (Coded Mark Inversion) Bi-directional Auto revertive MSTU equipment alarm MSTU line failure alarm MSTU power supply failure
Figure 2.20 and Figure 2.21 shows the function of USW and BSW.
2-30
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Terminal A
USW BB INTF TX RX
USW USW TX
Terminal C
RX USW BB INTF
BSW
USW
TX
RX USW
BSW
BSW
USW
TX
RX USW
BSW
USW BB INTF
RX
TX
USW
USW
RX
TX
USW BB INTF
BSW
USW
RX
TX
USW
BSW
BSW
USW
RX
TX
USW
BSW
Propagation failure
Following propagation failure of Main 1 from Terminal B to Terminal A, USWs (shaded) of one direction from B to A of Main 1 operate as shown above. Other switches are not affected at all.
Figure 2.20 - Automatic Operation of USW
Terminal A
USW BB INTF TX

RX USW USW TX
Terminal C
RX USW BB INTF
BSW
USW
TX
RX USW
BSW
BSW
USW
TX
RX USW
BSW
USW BB INTF
RX
TX
USW
USW
RX
TX
USW BB INTF
BSW
USW
RX
TX
USW
BSW
BSW
USW
RX
TX
USW
BSW
Equipment Failure
Following equipment failure of Main 1 Terminal A (MSTU receiver), BSWs (shaded) of both directions B and A of Main 1 operate as shown above.
Figure 2.21 - Automatic Operation of BSW
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-31
UMN
2.4.3
Switching Priority
The following is the priority order of Radio Protection Switching;Table 2.3 - Priority Order of RPS Operation
Priority
Switching
Description
1 2 3
st nd
LOCKOUT FORCED AUTOMATIC
Inhibits any type of RPS operation Switch over to Prot CH unless the specified Main CH or Prot CH is locked out. (* Not effective in case of Prot CH error) The Main CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot CH is free and normal. The priority order of automatic switching is listed below. The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH by the command through LCT, if Prot CH is free and normal. Occasional traffic transmission (option) The lowest priority traffic is allowed to be transferred by Prot CH when Prot CH is free and normal.
rd
4 5
th
MANUAL OCC
th
Table 2.4 - Priority Order of Automatic Protection Switching

Priority Switching operation
Highest
BSW operation of Priority CH (default = Main 1) BSW operation of the first incoming channel BSW operation of the second incoming channel USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of Priority CH (default = Main 1) USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of the first incoming channel USW operation by F LOSS (Radio Frame Loss) of the second incoming channel USW operation by BER ALM of Priority CH (default = Main 1) USW operation by BER ALM of the first incoming channel
Lowest
USW operation by BER ALM of the second incoming channel
2-32
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2.4.4
Switching Initiator and Operation Time

Automatic protection of RPS is initiated by; Signal Failure : Frame alignment loss (F LOSS) of the Radio Frame Signal Degrade: Bit Error Ratio Alarm (BER ALM) or 1 bit error detection of radio parity before forward error correction.
Signal Failure (F LOSS alarm) F LOSS alarm is initiated within 3 m seconds after frame synchronization loss and recovered within 3 m seconds after establishing synchronization. Signal Degrade The threshold level of BER ALM can be set through the LCT. Table 2.5 shows the setting position and time to initiate/recover of BER ALM. Default setting is 2 . Table 2.5 - BER ALM Initiation Setting and Time to Initiate/Restore
BER ALM Initiation before Error correction BER after Error correction Time to Initiate (maximum) ALM Restoration before Error correction Time to Restore (average)
Setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 bit error 1 X 10 5 X 10 1 X 10 5 X 10 1 X 10 5 X 10 1 X 10
3 4 4 5 5 6 6
0 5 X 10 6 X 10 3 X 10 4 X 10 1 X 10 1 X 10 1 X 10
-12 -12 -12 -7 -8 -10 -11
---0.25 ms 0.5 ms 2.5 ms 5.0 ms 25.0 ms 50.0 ms 250.0 ms
no error 6 X 10 3 X 10 6 X 10 3 X 10 6 X 10 3 X 10 6 X 10
-5 -5 -6 -6 -7 -7 -8
5 ms 4 ms 8 ms 40 ms 80 ms 400 ms 800 ms 4000 ms
less less less
Switching Time Without occasional traffic: Less than 5 ms plus BER ALM detecting time and control signal propagation time. With occasional traffic: Less than 9.5 ms plus BER ALM detecting time and control signal propagation time. DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer) Automatic DADE ( 3 bits) functions to automatically synchronizes two baseband signals transmitted by a Main CH and Prot CH when having to carry out protection switching. Manual DADE (0 to 31 bits): compensates the baseband signal path difference between each Main CH and Prot CH.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-33
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Wait to Restore (WTR, option setting)
UMN
Delay time from the detection of BER ALM restoration up to releasing protection switching is available to eliminate unnecessary RPS operation when the propagation condition is unstable. If other channels fail during the WTR period, the WTR will be canceled immediately and Prot CH is taken over by the newly failed channel.
2.4.5
Occasional Traffic (option)

The lowest priority traffic can be transmitted by Prot CH when all channels are normal. If a channel fails, the occasional traffic will be immediately disconnected to remove traffic from the main failed channel. Extra OCC INTF and OPT INTF unit are required for occasional traffic transmission.
2-34
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2.5
Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU)

The SRT 1F equipment is equipped with a Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU) for each switching group. The main function of SCSU is: Interfacing the STM-1, Orderwire, User Channel, Wayside and Digital Communication Channel. Interfacing the Local Terminal and Network Management System. Interfacing the External Timing Clock Source. Perform Radio Protection Switching (RPS) at bipolar (CMI) level. Retrieve/register alarm/status data for protection control and indication. Retrieve/register Performance Monitoring data. Control the Radio Protection Switching unipolar signal level. System at bipolar and
Control the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP for STM-1 MS optical interface only). Provide Orderwire functions. Administrate the Timing Clock Synchronization. Relay Housekeeping (External) supervisory/control signal. Register the NE setting (provisioning) data.
The SCSU is composed of following units:

BSW SV TCU HK ECU
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
: Bipolar Switch unit for each main channel : Supervisory unit : Timing Control Unit : Housekeeping unit : Embedded Communication Unit : Occasional Traffic Interface unit : Baseband Switch Interface unit : Card protection (X and Y) is available as option.
OCC INTF BSW INTF Note:
(1)
(2) : Option, maximum 2 units can be installed. (3) : Option, maximum 2 units can be installed. (4) : Option, one unit will be installed for occasional traffic use. (5) : Option, one unit will be installed for RPS 2 (Group 2) control
Figure 2.22 shows the functional block diagram of SCSU.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-35
UMN
BSW units Main 1 to n

STM-1 CMI WS X 2 UC X 1 M1 M2 Mn Prot M1
MSTU units
M2 Mn
To/from Prot & M1 To/from all MSTUs
EXT CLK IN EQPT CLK OUT
TCU
To/from all MSTUs
HK ALARM IN HK CONTROL OUT
HK* SV unit ECU*
SCSU
DCC IN DCC OUT LCT LAN/X25 HK IN/OUT DCC IN/OUT Radio UC X 2 OW (2W VF) X 2 OW (4W VF) X 2
SV sub-unit for RPS 2
To/from RPS 2
VF/DGTL E1,E2
OW
* Note: HK and ECU are option

BBIU
BBC To/from STM-1 CMI In/out of BSW
Main 1 to n OPT in/out
BB
MSP SW
Figure 2.22 - Diagram of SCSU Function
2-36
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2.5.1
Signal Interface
STM-1 Electrical Interface and Wayside traffic 75 ohms unbalanced connectors are located on the front panel of the BSW unit. 120 ohms balanced connectors for Wayside traffic and other signals are located in the Connection Area of SCSU. Interface connector pin assignment is shown in par. 3. Installation of this manual.
2.5.2
Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit

A Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit is provided for each main channel. The STM-1 Electrical (CMI) signals to/from other equipment are interfaced through this BSW unit. In case of Optical interface, the signals converted to STM-1 CMI signal by the BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit, optional) interface this BSW unit. The BSW unit simultaneously switches the following signals: An STM-1 CMI signal Wayside Traffics (SOH and RFCOH), a User Channel (SOH)
The bipolar switch operation is not hitless and produces some data loss, however, it safely isolates the channel.
2.5.3
Supervisory (SV) unit

An SV unit is provided for each SRT 1F equipment to supervise/control the Radio Protection system. To control two RPS groups (RPS 1= group 1 and RPS 2 = group 2), the SV unit must be equipped with a sub-unit for RPS 2 control. The main function of SV unit is: Terminate Orderwires, User Channels and DCCs. Interface the Local Terminal, Network Management System (X.25) and ethernet. Retrieve/register alarm/status data for protection control and indication. Retrieve/register Performance Monitoring data. Control the RPS at bipolar and unipolar signal level. Control the MSP (for STM-1 MS optical interface only). Provide Orderwire functions. Register the NE setting (provisioning) data. Relay Housekeeping (8 item input and 4 item output)
Figure 2.23 shows LEDs switches and connectors of SV unit.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-37
UMN
SV
UNIT/RCI LINE MISC ACS/SWDL BACK UP NORM CR/MJ/RCI MN/WR MAINT CARD OUT ACO LAN 2W E1
X25/BTB
CALL E1 CALL E2 ACO SW
2W E2 LED TEST
LED Indicator Push SW Modular Jack D-sub 9 (f) Dip switch
Figure 2.23 - Front View of SV unit
2-38
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Table 2.6a - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (1/3)
LED Indication Group LED Color Status Description
Indication for SV unit
UNIT/RCI
Red
Steady on Blinking
Unit failure of SV unit Log memory threshold crossed RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit Normal operation of SV unit Configuration mismatch of SV unit SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal Housekeeping alarm (DI) on NE is logged on by user Mismatch of software version Software download is on progress Back up of setting data is on progress Normal operation of NE CR/MJ alarm of any unit in NE RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in NE MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE Maintenance condition of NE CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than WR CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious than WR Alarm cut off of NE E1 orderwire is being called E2 orderwire is being called
Green (Y) Yellow (G) LINE Red Green (Y) MISC ACS/SWDL Red Green (Y) Red Yellow (G) BACK UP Indication for NE NORM CR/MJ/RCI Yellow (G) Green (Y) Red
Steady on Blinking Steady on Steady on Steady on Steady on Steady on Blinking Steady on Steady on Steady on Blinking
MN/WR MAINT CARD OUT
Red Yellow (G) Red Yellow (G)
Steady on Steady on Steady on Steady on Steady on Blinking Blinking
ACO Orderwire CALL E1 CALL E2 Note : Green (Y) Yellow (G)
Yellow (G) Green (Y) Green (Y)
= Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1. = Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-39
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Table 2.6b - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (2/3)
Switch Control Switch Part No. Type Description
UMN
ACO SW LED TEST SV CPU TEST UL RESET ------
SW A2 SW A3 SW B2 SW A1 SW A1
Push Push Push Push Dip
Alarm cut off LED test Factory use Factory use Factory use
Tablr 2.6c - LED, Switch and Connector of SV unit (3/3)

Connector Function Connector Part No. Type Description
E1-2W E2-2W
CN 17 CN 18 CN 71
Modular Modular Multi-pin Modular Multi-pin Multi-pin Multi-pin
E1 orderwire 2-wire telephone E2 orderwire 2-wire telephone LCT (Local Terminal) connector LAN connector Factory use Factory use Factory use
LAN ----------------
CN 91 CN 41 CN 21 CN 51
LED Indication The SV unit displays indicate a summary of the alarms/status conditions on the SRT 1F equipment (NE) as shown on the
2-40
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Table 2.6. Detailed LED indications are available on each unit. Orderwire Function Two fully independent orderwires, E1 and E2 are provided. To use an orderwire, connect an ordinary 2-wire telephone set to E1-2W or E2-2W modular jack. The station is selectively called through the telephone key-pad. Individual station call: Station group call: Press #, Group No., Station No. Press #, Group No., * * ( 2 asterisks)
4-wire VF in/out ports are provided for the connection to/from other equipment. Housekeeping (HK) 8 items of HK alarm input and 4 items of HK control output are available as standard supply. Digital Communication Channel (DCC) A DCC line can be transmitted by the Main 1 channel and Protection channel.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-41
UMN
2.5.4
Timing Control Unit (TCU)

A Timing Control Unit (TCU) is provided for each SRT 1F equipment. The Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU) provides an extra slot and automatic/manual switching facilities for TCU unit protection (X and Y) as option. The TCU accepts the synchronization timing clock signal from three (3) STM-1 lines and/or two (2) external clock inputs (2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mb/s), then regenerates the clock signal to supply to the NE and external clock output port. The TCU generates the clock signal internally (Holdover mode and Internal mode) in case of signal source input loss. For detailed application, see 2.8.2 Synchronization.
2.5.5
Housekeeping (HK) unit

The SV unit can accommodate 8 items of Housekeeping (HK) input and 4 items of HK output. To increase Housekeeping (HK) in/out items, a maximum of two HK units can be installed as option.
Number of item SV unit only SV unit + HK 1 SV unit + HK 1 + HK 2 HK input (DI) 8 40 72 HK output (DO) 4 20 36
Housekeeping input (DI)
SRT 1F equipment
6.4 k L
Other equipment
Photo coupler
-48 V (-38.4 to 57.6 V)
0.3 mA to 11.3 mA
Housekeeping output (DO)

L
Relay
L
Max. I = 100 mA Max. V = DC 110 V
Figure 2.24 - Housekeeping in/out (DI/DO) Interface
2-42
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2.5.6
Embedded Communication Unit (ECU) (option)

The SV unit terminates a Digital Communication Channel (DCC) by using Main 1 channel and protection channel redundancy. To increase the number of DCC lines, a maximum of two ECU units can be installed as option, the ECU 1 for RPS group 1 and the ECU 2 for group 2. An ECU terminates maximum 8 DCC lines.
RSDCC (Radio)
SV unit
RSDCC (Line)
MSTU (RPS 1 - M1)
Prot
MSDCC (Line) M2
RSDCC (Line) Max. 6
ECU 1 unit
MSTU (RPS 1 - M2)
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
RSDCC (Radio)
GP1 - M n (n is selectable)
RSDCC (Line) Max. 7
M1
ECU 2 unit
MSTU (RPS 2 - M1)
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
Figure 2.25 - Configuration of DCC Lines with ECU
2.5.7
Occasional Interface (OCC INTF) unit (option)

An OCC INTF unit will be installed for optional occasional traffic transmission through the protection channel. The OCC INTF provides STM-1 CMI interface and to be installed under the BSW unit of the last main channel.
2.5.8
Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF) unit (option)

A BSW INTF unit will be installed on the 2nd SCSU to control the BSW units of the RPS 2 group. The BSW INTF relays control command and response signals between st nd the SV unit on the 1 SCSU, and the BSW units on the 2 SCSU.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-43
UMN
2.6
Baseband Interface Unit (BBIU)

The STM-1 Electrical interface (SE INTF) is the standard baseband interface of the SRT 1F equipment. The equipment is composed of a BRU (Branching Network Unit), MSTUs (Main Signal Transmission Unit) and a SCSU (Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit). The BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit) is optionally available for other type of interface, OPT INTF MS/RS (Optical Interface for Multiplex Section and Regenerator Section). The main function of the BBIU is to: Provide STM-1 Optical baseband interfacing. Perform the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) for OPT INTF (MS).
The BBIU is composed of following units: OPT INTF 1 ** * OPT INTF 2 ** MSPSW BBC [Note] * : Optical Interface 1 for 0 to 15 Km : Optical Interface 2 for 15 to 40 Km : Multiplex Section Protection Switch for OPT INTF : BBIU Controller : An applicable baseband unit should be selected for each channel. Any combination of different types of interface cannot be configured. ** : Type of OPT INTF must be selected according to fiber optic length. See Table 2.7.
2.6.1
Optical Interface (OPT INTF) unit

The main function of OPT INTF is to: Convert the STM-1 signal from optical to electrical (CMI) and electrical to optical. Drop/insert Orderwires, a User Channel and Digital Communication Channels (*). Drop/insert Section Overhead (SOH); B1,B2, J0, K1, K2, S1 and SSMB (*). AU-4 pointer processing for radio section(*). Check Frame alignment of the STM-1 signal (*). Descramble/scramble the STM-1 signal (*). Recover/retime clock synchronization (*). Provide baseband loop back on the line and radio sides (*).
Note: * marked functions of MSTU are canceled if the BBIU is installed.
2-44
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Three types of OPT INTF are provided according to fiber optic length. Table 2.7 shows the characteristics of each OPT INTF unit. Table 2.7 - Characteristics of OPT INTF
Unit OPT INTF 1 OPT INTF 2
Application code (ITU-T G.957) Typical hop Operation wavelength range (nm) Transmitter at reference point S Source type Special characteristics - Maximum RMS width (nm) - Maximum -20 dB width (nm) - Minimum side mode suppression ratio (dB) Mean launched power - Maximum (dBm) - Minimum (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Optical path between S and R Attenuation range (dB) Maximum dispersion (ps/nm) Minimum optical return loss of cable point at S, including connectors (dB) Maximum discrete reflectance between S & R (dB) Receiving at reference point R Minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Maximum optical path penalty including chirp and dispersion (dB) Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R (dB) Connector Bit rate ITU-T Recommendation Reference
S-1.1 0 - 15 Km 1260 - 1360
L-1.1 15 - 40 Km 1280 1335
MLM
MLM
7.7 -
4.0 -
-8 -15 8.2
0 -5 10
0 -12 96 NA NA
10 28 185 NA NA
-28 -8 1 NA SC type or FC type
-34 -10 1 NA
STM-1 : 155.520 Mb/s 20 ppm ITU-T G.957 Table 2 and G.703
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-45
UMN
The baseband signal converted to STM-1 CMI is applied to the Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit of SCSU via the MSPSW unit. Figure 2.27 shows the diagram of the Optical Interface terminal without MSP. Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) To increase the reliability of the fiber optic line, the Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) on the line side is provided as option. Figure 2.26 shows the functional diagram of MSP.
SDH Optical Terminal DSTR INTF STM-1 Optical line Line X SRT 1F Radio Terminal (OPT INTF MSP) OPT INTF (X)
MSPSW
SEL
BSW
MSTU
STM-1 CMI input
SEL
INTF Line Y
OPT INTF (Y) DSTR STM-1 CMI output
Figure 2.26 - Function of Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) Features of MSP operation are as follows: Protection ratio Signal level Operation mode Initiator : : : : 1+1 STM-1 Electrical unipolar by IC gate Bi-directional/uni-directional (selectable) Non revertive Signal Fail (SF) - Loss of STM-1 frame synchronization - Loss of optical signal input - Multiplex section AIS Signal Degrade (SD)
-3 -5 -9 - BER : 10 (SF or SD), 10 to 10
- PM : STEP (SD or SF) FESP, TESP, FSEP, TSEP K1 control signal from the far end station Switching time Priority order Lock-in parameter : : : Less than 50 ms plus alarm detection time Lockout > Forced > Auto (SF) > Auto (SD) > Manual Switching count, Monitor time, Hold time
2-46
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Note: BER PM - STEP : Bit Error Ratio : Performance Monitor : Short Term Performance Continuing period of Loss of frame or Severely errored second - FESP - TESP - FSEP - TSEP Switching count Monitor time Hold time : 15 minutes Errored Second Performance : 24 hours Errored Second Performance : 15 minutes Performance Severely Errored Second
: 24 hours Severely Errored Second Performance : The number of MSP operation to start Lock-in during the Monitor time. : The period to monitor Switching count to start Lock-in. : The duration from start to end of Lock-in condition.
Figure 2.28 shows the diagram of Optical Interface terminal with MSP.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-47
UMN
2.6.2
MSP SW and BBC

MSP SW A Multiplex Section Protection Switch (MSPSW) unit is to be provided for each main channel. The MSPSW unit is a protection switching device for the OPT INTF (with MSP) terminal. The MSPSW unit functions as interface of the STM-1 electrical (CMI) signal between a BB INTF (OPT INTF with/without MSP) and a Bipolar Switch (BSW) of SCSU. BBC One BBIU Controller (BBC) unit is equipped on each BBIU. The BBC controls the MSPSW units following the control command from the Supervisory (SV) unit of the SCSU.
2-48
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Figure 2.27 shows the schematic diagram of the STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal without MSP and SD.
USW
MOD TX
DUP BPF

Main 1 OPT INTF STM-1 CMI MSP SW WS R,S UC(F1) Main 2 OPT INTF STM-1 CMI MSP SW WS R,S UC(F1) Main 3 OPT INTF STM-1 CMI MSP SW WS R,S UC(F1) BBC UC(F1) WS R,S STM-1 CMI BSW BSW BSW
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU
TDP
USW
MOD TX
BPF
RDP
USW
DEM RX
BPF
MSTU BRU
BBIU
RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO
STM-1 Unipolar
NOTE :
BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit
LCT
Figure 2.27 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal without MSP
SCSU
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-49
UMN
Figure 2.28 shows the schematic diagram of the STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal with MSP and without SD.
USW
MOD TX
DUP BPF
USW
DEM RX

X Main 1 Y OPT INTF OPT INTF MSP SW STM-1 BSW RDP WS R,S USW TDP USW
BPF
MSTU
MOD TX
BPF
DEM RX
BPF
UC(F1) X Main 2 Y OPT INTF OPT INTF STM-1 BSW RDP WS R,S USW TDP USW
MSTU
MSP SW
MOD TX
BPF
DEM RX
BPF
UC(F1) X Main 3 Y OPT INTF OPT INTF STM-1 BSW RDP WS R,S USW TDP USW
MSTU
MSP SW
MOD TX
BPF
DEM RX
BPF
UC(F1) BBC UC(F1) WS R,S STM-1 CMI RUC 1,2 EOW 2W (E1,E2) EOW 4W (E1,E2) OSSI (X25/Q3) Housekeeping DI DO
MSTU BRU
BBIU
STM-1 Unipolar
NOTE :
BRU : Branching Network Unit MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit BBIU : BaseBand Interface Unit
LCT
Figure 2.28 - Schematic Diagram of STM-1 Optical Interface Terminal with MSP
SCSU
2-50
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2.7
2.7.1
Applications
Co-Channel Operation
The Co-channel frequency operation system can simultaneously transmit two STM-1 signals over the same RF frequency carrier using dual polarization, horizontal and vertical. While the alternated operation can transmit only one STM-1 signal per RF frequency. This system can double the spectrum efficiency. The transmission capacity of Way side, User channel and other auxiliary signals will be also doubled. For the Co-channel operation, the SRT 1F equipment needs the following options: An XPIC (Cross Polarization Interference Canceler) module to be installed on the MSTU (Main Signal Transmit Unit). Rx local oscillators running in synchronism.
Cross Polarization Interference Canceler (XPIC) The XPIC is provided to improve the interference distortion caused by cross polarization interference between V-polarization and Hpolarization. For the Co-channel operation, a high Cross Polarization Discrimination (XPD) antenna is used. However, cross polarization interference cannot be compensated only by a high XPD antenna. In addition to a high XPD antenna, a Cross Polarization Interference Canceler is provided. The XPIC is an adaptive cancellation circuit. Two receivers with the same radio frequency receive the combination desired of signal and interference signal components (a part of orthogonal polarization signal). Each of the two Receivers extract their relevant interference signal. The received interference component is removed from the received signal after adaptive amplitude/phase adjustment. Cross cable connections from each XPIC OUT to XPIC IN are required. Figure 2.29 shows the functional diagram of XPIC. Figure 2.30 shows the cross cable connection of MSTUs. Receive Local Carrier Oscillator Two receivers with the same frequency shall be supplied with local synchronized carrier signals. A cable connection to/from the REF I/O of two MSTUs is required. The baseband clock signals are reciprocally synchronized through software setting. Route ID Different route Ids for radio section shall be set for proper signal identification between V-polarization and H-polarization. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-51
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION Master/Slave setting Master/Slave setting on the MSTU is carried out through the LCT.
UMN
Transmitter X
Desired signal LOC
Receiver X
XPIC OUT 70 MHz RF LOC XPIC OUT 70 MHz IF LOC
LOC
REF I/O
XPIC
XPIC IN
Interference
XPIC
REF I/O IF LOC
LOC Desired signal LOC
Transmitter Y
Receiver Y
Figure 2.29 - Functional Diagram of XPIC
REF I/O (RF LOC)
XPIC IN (70 MHz) XPIC OUT (70 MHz)
Figure 2.30 - Cross Cable Connection of MSTUs for Co-channel Operation
2-52
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
2.7.2
Synchronization
The SRT 1F system shall be synchronized to the reference clock source of the network. The SRT 1F equipment clock signal is supplied through the TCU (Timing Clock Unit) of the SCSU (Supervise, Control and Switching Unit).
2.7.2.1
Synchronization Source The SRT 1F can accept one of three kinds of signals as its synchronization clock source. Incoming STM-1 Signal (LINE) to TCU, maximum 3 inputs From STM-1 line input (Line side) From MSTU receiver output (Radio side)
External Clock Input (EXT) to TCU, maximum 2 inputs 2.048 MHz or 2.048 Mb/s
Input connectors are located in the Connection Area of the SCSU. TCU Oscillator Holdover mode: In case of synchronization reference source loss, the TCU generates the clock signal in accordance with the data present just before the interruption. After Holdover mode: Free-running self oscillation. Internal Oscillator: If TCU fails, MSTU generates the internal freerunning clock signal.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-53
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 2.7.2.2 Synchronization Mode The SRT 1F has two Synchronization Mode options. Mode 1
UMN
The SRT 1F does not directly output to the Synchronous Source Unit (SSU). The SRT 1F receives the reference clock source from other equipment through the STM-1 signal input (LINE) or EXT CLK input connectors (EXT). The SRT 1F is generally operated in this mode. Mode 2 The SRT 1F directly outputs to the Synchronous Source Unit (SSU). For Equipment Clock (EC) source, the external clock from the SSU is basically the first choice. Figure 2.31 shows Synchronization modes. SSU: Synchronous Source Unit High quality reference clock source equipment to generate/regenerate the primary/secondary clock signal of the network in accordance with ITU-U Rec. G.813.
2-54
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Ext 2M CLK (X) (Y) Line CLK PRI 1 PRI 2 PRI 3 INT CLK
EC Selection (Max. 3)
to be selected according to Quality (SSMB) & Priority
PLL TCU
EQPT CLK Output to other Equipment 2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
T0
EQPT Clock supply to SRT 1F Equipment
a - Diagram of Synchronization Mode 1
Line CLK PRI 1 PRI 2 PRI 3
LC Selection (Max. 3)
EQPT CLK Output to other Equipment 2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
T4 SSU
INT CLK Ext 2M CLK (X)
EC Selection (Max. 2)
EQPT CLK Output to other Equipment
PLL
2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
(Y)
T0 TCU
EQPT Clock supply to SRT 1F Equipment
b - Diagram of Synchronization Mode 2 Figure 2.31 Diagram of Synchronization
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-55
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 2.7.2.3 Clock Mode
UMN
Two clock modes are available for TCU setting, the TCU mode and the THROUGH mode. TCU mode On the down stream (from the primary station to the end station), the equipment clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the primary station. On the up stream (from the end station to the primary station), the clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the primary station on the down stream. THROUGH mode On the down stream, the equipment clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from primary station. On the up stream, the clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the end station.
TCU mode
SRT 1F
THROUGH mode
SRT 1F
TCU
TCU
Down stream Primary station Up stream End station
Figure 2.32 - Clock Mode of TCU 2.7.2.4 Quality Level (S1 byte) The quality level of the synchronization source is defined by the S1 byte of RSOH. The TCU selects best quality source as reference. Table 2.8 - S1 byte code and Quality level
Quality Level S1 byte bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8 Quality description
2 3 4 5 6 6
0 0 1 1 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 0 1
Traceable to ITU-T G. 811 (Best quality) Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 transit Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 local TCU internal clock Quality unknown Do not use for synchronization
2-56
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 2.7.2.5 Line Clock Priority
Generally, the SRT 1F receives the reference clock from the incoming STM-1 signal. The SRT 1F facing the end station accepts the source from the Line side (Access ID = GP1-Wn-L, n= Main channel number), input to BSW unit. The SRT 1F facing the master station accepts the source from the Radio side (Access ID = GP1-Wn-R), the output of MSTU receiver. Figure 2.33 shows an example of line clock selection of the SDH radio system.
Master station
MUX
SRT 1F
SRT 1F
MUX
SRT 1F
SRT 1F
MUX
End station
Line side GP1-Wn-L
Radio side GP1-Wn-R
Line side GP1-Wn-L
Radio side GP1-Wn-R
Note: n = Main channel number Normally, Main 1 (n = 1) shall be selected as Priority 1 (PRI 1)
Figure 2.33 - Example of Line Clock Selection
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-57
UMN
2.7.3
2.7.3.1
Orderwire Applications
Orderwire Extension The SRT 1F provides two modular jacks for orderwire telephone connection, E1 and E2. In addition, 4-wire VF terminals of E1 and E2 are provided for connection to external equipment. Signal Impedance Input Level Output Level Maximum Output Level 4-wire Voice Frequency 600 ohms balanced Standard -4.0 dBr -16.0 to -0.5 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step Standard -4.0 dBr -8.5 to +7.0 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step +3.17 dBmO for -law +3.14 dBmO for A-law
2.7.3.2
Digital-Through At repeater stations and back to back stations, orderwires can be forwarded as digital signal level when telephone sets are on-hook or not connected. When one of the telephone sets (E1 or E2) is off-hooked, both the E1 and E2 line are terminated and converted to the voice frequency level. Digital through function is provided to minimize the degradation of orderwires due to analog/digital conversion and noise/distortion intrusion at the analog signal level.
2.7.3.3
Ring Protection In case of ring network configuration, the orderwire lines establish a loop circuit. This loop circuit may cause the orderwire signal to self oscillate (hauling). To prevent hauling, a port of the orderwire circuit shall be disconnected at the master station. If any section of the loop was interrupted by line failure, the orderwire ring protection automatically reconnects the loop in order to recover the orderwire communication. Figure 2.34 shows the function of Orderwire Ring Protection.
2-58
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Master station
Master station
These ports are disconnected to stop hauling.
VF circuit
VF circuit
Without Ring Protection
With Ring Protection
Line failure
VF circuit Master station In Case of Line Failure With Ring Protection

These ports are reconnected to recover the orderwire circuit.
Figure 2.34 - Ring Protection
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
2-59
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
3.1 Installation preliminaries
In this chapter are described the SRT 1F rack installation procedures. Specifically: Storage Preparation for unpacking Unpacking procedure
3.1.1
Storage, Unpacking and Inspection

This procedure describes the unpacking and inspection of the SRT 1F equipment. It assumes that all equipment has been received and that all data forms and job engineering drawings have been completed and are available.
3.1.1.1
Storage When the equipment is to be kept in storage, leave the equipment in the shipping containers. Store slide-in units in the special bags the units were originally shipped in. The bags are coated with a conductive material and will protect the slide-in units from damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Figure 3.1 shows examples of ESD warning labels.
Figure 3.1 - Electrostatic Discharge Warning Labels After unloading the containers, check the contents against the invoice sheet. Check containers for external damage, quantity and contents. If any defects or errors are found, immediately contact the person in charge for proper remedy. Do not leave the containers outdoors. Store the containers in a place provided with adequate roof cover which will protect the containers from rain and dust. Keep the containers in a dry place. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-1
3. INSTALLATION 3.1.1.2 Preparation The unpacking site shall be protected from rain, water, dust etc. Prepare sufficient space for the unpacking site. Prepare the tools for the unpacking of the containers.
UMN
The quantity of the equipment and installation materials should be checked while unpacking 3.1.1.3 Unpacking and Inspection Before unpacking the equipment, inspect the containers for any signs of damage that may have occurred during shipment. File any claims for shipping damage with the transportation company according to their published procedure. When unpacking the equipment, use the packing list that accompanies each shipment to determine that all items are present before continuing with the installation. Notify the nearest Siemens representative if there is a shortage of any kind. 3.1.1.4 General Unpacking Method 1. Cut the straps that hold the cover on the container. 2. Open the cover and pull out the sealed polythene bag. 3. Cut immediately under the seal with scissors or a knife. 4. Remove the equipment from the pack by gripping the protectors attached to the equipment. 5. Immediately check the contents, according to the invoice sheets. 6. Check if the component and parts have been damaged. 7. Notify the nearest Siemens representative if there is damage of any kind.
3.1.2
Storage of Spare Units

Spare units are separately packed from other main frame units. These units should be kept in clean places avoiding high temperature and high humidity. These units are stored in the special bags which are coated with a conductive material and will protect spare units from damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD). See Figure 3.1, for indication markings.
3-2
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.1.3
Accessories
There are two kinds of accessories. Installation, such as connector plugs or connector assembly, Maintenance, according to the routine maintenance plan, maintenance accessories should be stored in the maintenance area.
3.2
3.2.1
Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers

Warning and General Handling
This procedure lists precautionary measures which must be followed when dealing with optical fibers and optical fiber components.
3.2.1.1
Tools Required No tools are required for this procedure.
3.2.1.2
Warning Messages The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of equipment. WARNING Never look into the end of an optical cable or fibre pigtail. PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser radiation is present. Never handle exposed fibre with bare hands or permit contact with the body. Fibre fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect and remove. Figure 3.2 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting and receiving units:
Figure 3.2 - Laser Warning Labels SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-3
3. INSTALLATION 3.2.1.3 Storage
UMN
1. Protective caps are provided with the optical connectors of the optical cable (see Figure 3.3). 2. Do not expose the optical cables to direct sunlight. The recommended storage temperature is 10 to 60C (14 to 140F), and the maximum recommended relative humidity is 90%.
Figure 3.3 - Protective Cap (SC/PC Connector) 3.2.1.4 Handling 1. Do not pull the optical cable when the connector is attached to the optical unit (see Figure 3.4).
Figure 3.4 - Optical Cable Pulling 2. Take care not to bend or obstruct the optical cable (see Figure 3.5).
Figure 3.5 - Optical Cable Bending and Obstruction Limits
3-4
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION 3. Do not bend the optical cable at a radius of less than 50 mm (see Figure 3.6).
Figure 3.6 - Optical Cable Minimum Bending Radius 4. Do not twist the optical cable more than 360 per meter of length (see Figure 3.7).
Figure 3.7 - Optical Cable Twist Limits 5. Do not drop or step on the optical cable and do not subject it to excessive vibration (see Figure 3.8).
Figure 3.8 - Optical Cable Vibration and Shock Damage
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-5
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.2.2
Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables

This procedure details the precautions which must be taken to preserve the integrity of optical connectors and cables during connection and disconnection.
3.2.2.1
Tools Required No tools are required for this procedure.
3.2.2.2
Preparation 1. Verify that there are no serious defects in the optical cables and connectors. 2. Clean the optical fibre end surface with a cotton swab soaked in alcohol.
3.2.2.3
Connection Procedure 1. While holding the connector body, insert the connector. Ensure the connector key engages.
3.2.2.4
Disconnection Procedure 1. Gently pull the connector body away from the optical coupling interface. Be careful not to pull or bend the optical cable. 2. Place a protective cap over the optical cable connector
3.2.3
Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors

This section provides procedures for the cleaning of optical fibre cables and connectors.
3.2.3.1
Tools Required The tools required are: Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit (CLETOP Reel Type A) If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available use: Pure alcohol Mediswabs Lens Cleaning Paper
3-6
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 3.2.3.2 Procedure If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is available:
3. INSTALLATION
1. Insert the connector into the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit. 2. Twist the connector back and forth. 3. Slide the connector down the slot in the cleaning kit. 4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 in the other slot of the cleaning kit. 5. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in par. 3.2.4. If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available: 1. Use a Mediswab dampened with alcohol to clean the end of the fibre connector. 2. Allow the connector to air dry. 3. Wipe the end of the connector with lens cleaning paper. 4. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in the following point, Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors.
3.2.4
3.2.4.1
Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors

Connector End-face Definitions The condition of the connector end-face is a significant factor for the long-term operation of the network. This procedure defines the requirements for the inspection of terminated optical fibres.
3.2.4.2
End-face Zone Definitions The connector end-face is divided into the following regions: core cladding
For inspection purposes the cladding region is divided into internal and external areas. See Figure 3.9.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-7
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
Internal Cladding area =62.5 m External Cladding area =125 m Adhesive Bond Ferrule Area Figure 3.9 - Connector End-face
3.2.4.3
Defect Definitions The following definitions apply: a scratch defect is a linear extended surface mark a pit defect is a localised surface mark a crack defect is a stress fracture either wholly within the fibre or intersecting the fibre surface a chip defect has material broken away from the fibre following the generation of crack defects
3.2.4.4
Scratch and Pit Defects The core region must be free from blemishes.
3-8
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 3.2.4.5 Chip Defects
3. INSTALLATION
The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from defects, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. The outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for more than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. See Figure 3.10 for acceptance criteria. Acceptable: Chip in outer cladding area only
Internal cladding area Unacceptable: Chip extends into inner cladding area
External cladding area Acceptable: Chip in outer cladding area only
Figure 3.10 - Chip Defects
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-9
3. INSTALLATION 3.2.4.6 Crack Defects
UMN
The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from defects, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. The outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for more than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. See Figure 3.11 for acceptance criteria. Unacceptable: Crack extends for more than 25% of cladding circumference
Internal cladding area Unacceptable: Crack extends into inner cladding area
External cladding area Acceptable: Crack in outer cladding area only
Figure 3.11 - Crack Defects
3-10
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 3.2.4.7 Tools Required 3.2.4.8 Fiberscope
3. INSTALLATION
Procedure To view the optical fiber connector: 1. Insert the connector into the Fiberscope, using the adapter if required. 2. Depress the trigger to turn the Fiberscope on. 3. Adjust the Fiberscope, if necessary, to position the image in the center of the viewing area, and focus. 4. Clean the connector face in accordance with par. 3.2.3 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors, if required. 5. If the fiber does not meet the acceptance criteria due to damage, the cable must be replaced. 6. If the fiber does not meet the acceptance criteria after cleaning, and further cleaning is not effective, the cable must be replaced.
3.3
Rack Installation
This chapter describes the precautions and the procedure required for the installation of the SRT 1F rack.
3.3.1
Precautions
As a general precaution, installing sites should be selected as follows:
3.3.1.1
Suitable Places for Equipment Installation Do not install in places subject to vibration. Do not install in dusty places. Avoid places which becomes high in temperature. (recommended range 20C to 40C) Install on a flat and level floor. Do not eat or drink in the vicinity of the equipment Keep away from strong electromagnetic fields. When cleaning equipment, use a soft bristled brush and a vacuum cleaner with plastic nozzle or low pressure dry air.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-11
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.3.2
Safety Measures for Equipment Handling.

Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during installation, removal, storage, or shipment. Such units are stamped with anti-electrostatic marks and require special care in handling and storage. When handling slide-in units for installation, removal or option setting, always wear a wrist strap which is connected to safety ground. Hold only the edge of slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on the units. Transport and store slide-in units in the special bags in which the units were originally shipped. Always fold the open end of the bag over and close it securely with tape. When returning units to Siemens use these special bags. Use the original shipping containers whenever possible. During installation or replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with a slow, but firm motion. They should not be pushed quickly into slots. Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimize power surges during installation. Slow insertion will ensure that the slidein units are not damaged.
3.3.3
Tools Required
Standard hand tools and socket wrench set are required. Wrist strap - to be worn at all times when handling circuit cards.
3.3.4
Preparation
Use working gloves while installing and securing the equipment According to the local plans and procedures, the main structure must already be installed before installation of the equipment begins. Check and ensure that all civil works necessary for the installation of the equipment have been completed. Ensure that these checks are made before the start of the installation work. If anything is wrong or incomplete, take corrective steps before starting the installation work.
3-12
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 3.3.4.1 Bay Mounting
3. INSTALLATION
When mounting the equipment rack, pay attention to other nearby equipment and keep enough space to erect the equipment rack. Before mounting the rack, heavy units such as MSTU must be taken off. (originally, these are separately packed from the equipment rack, for safe transportation.) Ensure that each unit is properly inserted and secured, otherwise the units will drop out of the shelf when mounting the bay upright To avoid unexpected material from dropping off, remove in advance the material which easily mounts into the equipment rack.
3.3.4.2
Bay Securing Stand the rack in the vertical position at the designated bay layout. First securing the top of the rack, then the base. Use the ratchet wrench and suitable length extension bar to tighten the bolts for fixing.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-13
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.3.5
Rack Configuration
Figure 3.12 shows overview of SRT 1F radio equipment rack. Figure 3.13 shows the dimensions of the standard rack.
MSTU
SCSU
BBIU
(OPTION)
Figure 3.12 - Overview of SRT 1F equipment rack
3-14
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
Figure 3.13 - Dimension of standard Rack
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-15
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.3.6
Shelf Configuration
Figure 3.14 shows shelf configuration of MSTU. MSTU units are made to slide into the MSTU shelf via the plug-in adapter. DC power supply and RF signals connection between unit and shelf are plugged in via the plug-in adapter. Other signal connections such as baseband signals, supervision and control signals also plugged in via the multi-pin connector mounted on the BWB of the SCSU shelf.
MSTU Adapter
MSTU unit
MSTU shelf
MSTU Adapter
Slide in rail
Figure 3.14 - MSTU shelf and MSTU unit SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-16
UMN
3. INSTALLATION Figure 3.15 and Figure 3.16 show overview of SCSU and BBIU shelf. Connectors for MSTU
Figure 3.15 - Overview of SCSU shelf
Figure 3.16 - Overview of BBIU shelf
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-17
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.3.7
3.3.7.1
How to Install Shelves & Units

Preparation of Shelves SCSU : Remove connector covers of the channel to be installed (Figure 3.17).
Figure 3.17 - Remove connector covers
3-18
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN MSTU :
3. INSTALLATION
Remove the MSTU Adapter from each MSTU (Figure 3.18). Remove two fittings from each MSTU Adapter (Figure 3.19) These fittings are for transportation and unit testing only. Install MSTU Adapters and Slide in Rails on to the shelf. (Figure 3.20)
Figure 3.18 Remove MSTU
Adapter Figure 3.19 - Remove 2 Fittings
Figure 3.20 - Install MSTU Adapter and Slide in Rails
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-19
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.3.8
Mounting of Shelves
Shelves should be mounted on to the rack in the given order. BBIU (if applicable), SCSU, MSTU then BRU (Figure 3.21and Figure 3.22).
Position
BRU
MSTU
SCSU
Install BBIU first, then SCSU, MSTU and BRU. If BBIU is not applicable, leave the space for BBIU (498mm H) + cabling space (approx. 70 mm), then start mounting the SCSU, MSTU and BRU.
BBIU
Figure 3.21
3-20
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
4 x 3 X 6S
4 x 4 X 8S 2 x 3 X 6S
Figure 3.22 Screew together the MSTU and SCSU
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-21
3. INSTALLATION 3.3.8.1 Mounting of Slide-In Units Slide-in units are locked to the shelf through latches.
UMN
To remove a slide in unit (SIU), lift latching levers and pull out the slide in unit. To mount a SIU, lift latching levers first, then slide in the unit firmly and close latching levers ascertaining that the levers engage into the shelf securely. Full size SIUs have 2 latches both at the top and at the bottom. To mount an SIU, ascertain that 2 levers are engaging to the shelf evenly when closing latching levers. Installing an MSTU : An MSTU is equipped with 2 mounting screws. When installing an MSTU, remove the front cover first. Then turn 2 screws evenly by lightly pressing the middle of the MSTU. Do not slam the unit.
Figure 3.23 Full size unit mounting
3-22
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN Do not slam the unit.
3. INSTALLATION
Figure 3.24 Half size unit mounting Half size SIUs have only one latch at the bottom. To remove/mount an SIU, remove a guard rail from the shelf first as shown at the top left.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-23
3. INSTALLATION
UMN Figure 3.25 to Figure 3.26 show typical cable laying for inter-shelf connection.
DC power supply Cable
Figure 3.25 - Cable laying of MSTU shelf
External signal line
Inter shelf connection cable DC power supply cable
Figure 3.26 - Cable laying of SCSU shelf
3-24
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
Optical fiber cable
DC power supply cable Inter shelf connection External signal lines
Figure 3.27 - Cable laying of BBIU shelf
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-25
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.4
Inter Shelf Connections

This chapter provides information on the inter shelf connections and customer interface connections between SRT 1F equipment and the customers equipment.
3.4.1
SRT 1F Input
The equipment can operate one of followings five Base Band interface conditions. Base Band Interface Unit are optionally supplied for STM-1 optical interface operation and PDH E4 interface operation. 1. MSTU unit for STM-1 electrical interface One MSTU unit per channel may be used 2. OPT S-11P unit for STM-1 optical interface S-1.1 A maximum of two OPT S-11P units per channel may be used. 3. OPT L-11P unit for STM-1 optical interface L-1.1 A maximum of two OPT L-11P units per channel may be used.
3.4.1.1
Warning Messages The following safety precautions must be observed when installing or maintaining the waveguide. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of equipment. Figure 3.28 shows the warning labels that are attached on all emitting and receiving units:
Figure 3.28 - Warning Labels
3-26
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.4.2
Waveguide Connection
Figure 3.29 shows the location of the antenna port on SRT 1F radio equipment.
Vertical CH 1, 3, 5, 7
MAIN SD
Horizontal CH 2, 4, 6, 8
SD MAIN
(a) Alternated Operation
Vertical CH 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
MAIN SD
Horizontal CH 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
MAIN SD
(b) Co-channel Operation and independent use of rack by V / H polarization
Vertical CH 1, 2, 3, 4
MAIN SD
Horizontal CH 1, 2, 3, 4
SD MAIN
(c) Co-channel Operation and common use of rack by V / H polarization
TOP of ETSI rack
TOP of Waveguides
59.4
2190.7
BRU
Figure 3.29 - Antenna port location on top of the rack
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-27
3. INSTALLATION 3.4.2.1 Tools Required Standard hand tools Step ladder for connecting wave guide Ratchet type set of socket wrenches Waveguide Allen keys Torque wrench for waveguide Allen keys
UMN
3-28
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 3.4.2.2 Preparation
3. INSTALLATION
Do not connect feeder to the equipment until all the twists in the feeder have been corrected. See Figure 3.30 A person experienced in waveguide connections should carry out the installation of the feeder to the equipment. Refer to the wave guide installation manual.
Figure 3.30 - Twisting Wave guides 3.4.2.3 Precautions When the wave guides are connected to the radio equipment, pay attention not to apply a forced twisting torque to the radio equipment side. Refer to the wave guide installation manual.
3.4.3
Connection of Primary Power Lead

This section provides procedures for installing DC power and ground cables in the equipment rack and it shows the office power input terminal identification. There are two methods for DC power cable installation. As shown in Figure 3.31, one is that the DC power distribution board and the DC power connector of each unit and shelf is directly connected. As shown in Figure 3.32, the other is that the DC power from DC power distribution board is received by the optionally supplied PDU (Power Distribution Unit) then distributed to each unit and shelf.
3.4.3.1
Tools Required Standard hand tools DMM (Digital Multi-Meter)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-29
3. INSTALLATION -48V DC Power for MSTU, SCSU, BBIU from Office Power Supply
UMN
Crimping terminal
DC power for SCSU
AMP Connector
BSW 1 BSW 2 BSW 3 BSW 4 BSW 5 BSW 6 BSW 7
Figure 3.31 - DC power connection to the rack.
Power cable
- V IN - V IN - V IN
BRU
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
[P]
SCSU
CN 11
- V1 IN
BBIU
BB INTF P BBC BB INTF X BB INTF Y
Note : SCSU of 2nd RPS does not require power supply.
MSTU 1
TCU X TCU Y
- V2 IN
[M1 M1] M1
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
HK 1
MSPSW 1
[M2 M2] M2
CN75 CN78
MSTU 3
HK 2
MSPSW 2 MSPSW 3
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
OCC INTF
MSPSW 4 MSPSW 5
[M4 M4] M4
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
CN 72 CN 79
MSTU 5
ECU 1
MSPSW6
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
SV
CN 21 CN 22 CN 73 CN 74 CN76 CN77
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
CN 40
CN 41 CN 42 CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
MSTU 8
- V2 IN
DC power for BBIU
ECU 2
MSPSW 7
CN 31
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
BB INTF X
[M2 M2] M2
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M3 M3] M3
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M4 M4] M4
3-30
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M5 M5] M5
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M6 M6] M6
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M7 M7] M7
BB INTF Y
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
D C P ow er D istribution B oard of O ffice Pow er S upply
AMP Crimping Terminal

P D U (O PTIO N )
CN 10 CN 11 CN 12
AMP Connector
- V IN
[P ]
CN 1
CN 2
- V IN
CN 3
- V IN
CN 4
CN 5
- V IN
CN 6
- V IN
CN 7
CN 8
- V IN
CN 9
AMP Connector
- V IN
- V IN
MSTU 1
[M M 1]
MSTU 2
[M M 2]
MSTU 3
[M M 3]
MSTU 4
[M M 4]
MSTU 5
[M M 5]
MSTU 6
[M M 6]
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M M 7]
MSTU 8
AMP Connector
- V2 IN
AMP Connector
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
Power cable
SCSU
C N 11
- V1 IN
Note : SCSU of 2nd RPS does not require power supply.
Figure 3.32 - DC power connection to the rack with PDU
BSW 1 TCU X BBC
B B IU
BB INTF P BB INTF X BB INTF Y
BSW 2 TCU Y
- V2 IN
BSW 3
[M M 1]
BSW 4 HK 1
MSPSW 1
BSW 5 HK 2
MSPSW 2
C N 12 C N 13 C N 14
C N 75 C N 78
BSW 6
MSPSW 3
BSW 7
C N 40 C N 41 C N 42
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
C N 43 C N 44 C N 45 C N 33 C N 34 C N 35
OCC INTF
C N 15 C N 16 C N 17 C N 31 C N 21 C N 22
C N 32 C N 23 C N 24
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
C N 72 C N 79
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
C N 73 C N 74
C N 76 C N 77
BB INTF X
[M M 2]
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M M 3]
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M M 4]
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M M 5]
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M M 6]
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M M 7]
BB INTF Y
3-31
3. INSTALLATION 3.4.3.2 Procedure
UMN
Prepare power lead and crimping terminal as specified on the local plan. Main DC power distribution board side Removing of cable sheath (see Figure 3.33 for details) Crimp terminal by using die. Extend the power leads from the power distribution board to the equipment cable inlet through the cable rack. Assemble the AMP connector supplied as a standard accessory.
Equipment side Figure 3.33 shows the cable sheath and terminal connection.
Recommendable cable AWG 4
Figure 3.33 - Cable Sheath 1. Disconnect office power or remove fuses from bay fuse panel and use a voltmeter to ensure that the supply rail is at zero volts (with reference to the earth ground). 2. Connect the red (0 V) lead to the battery return terminal of the power distribution board. 3. Connect the blue (48 V) lead to the 48V terminal. 4. Extend the power leads from the power distribution board to the equipment cable inlet through the cable rack. 5. Structure AMP connector supplied as a standard accessory. 6. Connect the AMP connector to the DC power connector of the unit/shelf. 7. Reconnect office power or re-install fuses.
3-32
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 3.4.3.3 Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment
3. INSTALLATION
The crimping method (Solderless) shall be applied only to the power wiring connecting terminal and to the indoor connection branching. Only annealed copper is only used for this method. See Figure 3.34 for crimping method. Crimping Method 1. Choose the die fit for the cross-section area of the terminal to use. 2. Insert the terminal into the die section of the instrument and press the terminal till it does not slip off. Then set the soldering portion of the terminal body opposite to the male die while inserting the terminal body to the center of the die. Take care not to deform the terminal when compressing it. 3. Start crimping the terminal after having ascertained that vary the relative position of terminal and die 4. Insulating treatment at the compressed portion. This treatment shall be performed as follows: More than 1 mm in width on the insulated sheath will be sealed. Wind PVC tape with a half width tape pitch as required.
Figure 3.34 shows the method for crimping the terminal and the cable conductor.
Figure 3.34 - Method of Crimping 3.4.3.4 Precautions 1. This equipment has the ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Frame Ground (FG) terminal. Therefore, if your station has an ESD Ground terminal, connect to them. If not possible, connect to the FG of each equipment to keep the same voltage level as FG. 2. While connecting the power lead, do not drop in any cable sheathing or cable fragments. It may cause short circuits or faulty units. 3. Ensure that the cable is connected before turning on the main breaker.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-33
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.4.4
AMP hand Crimping Tool

This section provides application procedures for AMP hand crimping tools. Figure 3.35 shows over view of AMP hand crimping Tool 23470-1, which crimps the AMP Dynamic D-5 loose-piece tab and receptacle contacts listed in Figure 3.36. The front of the tool, into which the wire is inserted, is AMP marked. Wire Size Marking and the Contact Series marking on it. The contact is inserted into the Back of the tool. The tool features two fixed dies (crimper), two movable dies (anvils), a locator/insulation stop, and a CERTI-CRIMP ratchet. The locator/insulation stop has two functions: first, it positions the contact between the crimper and anvil before crimping; and second, it limits insertion distance of the stripped wire into the contact. In use, it rests in the locator slot of the contact. The CERTICRIMP ratchet assures full crimping of the contact. Once engaged the ratchet will not release until the handles have been fully closed.
Contact series name
FRONT OF TOOL CRIMPER
Wire Size ANVIL
Tool No.
CIRTI-CRIMP RATCHET
Figure 3.35 - AMP hand Crimping Tool
3-34
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
WIRE STRIP LENGTH 4.5 ~ 5.0
CONTACT Series: D-5(S) WIRE SIZE AWG: 16-14

2 Sq.(mm ): 1.23-2.27
CONTACT NO.:
316041-3
Front of Tool(Wire Size) Locator / Insulation stop Contact Series Name
Wire Slot in Locator Wire Size Stripped Wire
Contact Contact series Name Wire Barrel Locator slot (in contact) Insulation Barrel
Tool No.
Figure 3.36 - AMP hand Crimping Method
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-35
3. INSTALLATION 3.4.4.1 CRIMPING PROCEDURES 1. 2. 3. Hold the tool so FRONT is facing you.
UMN
Make sure ratchet is released by squeezing the tool handles and allowing them to open Fully. Holding contact by its mating portion and looking straight into front of the crimp section, insert contact from the back into die set. Position contact between crimpers so locator mates the locator slot. Holding contact in this position, squeeze tool handles together until insulation barrel anvil starts entry into insulation crimper. DO NOT deform insulation barrel or wire barrel. Insert a properly stripped wire through the wire slot in locator and into wire barrel of contact until insulation butts against the locator/insulation stop. Holding wire in place, squeeze tool handles together until ratchet releases. Use both hands after the wire is fixed. Allow tool handles to open fully. Remove ped contact from tool.
4.
5.
6. 7.
CAUTION: Care shall be taken to ensure that the contact is set at the right position (shown in Figure 3.37) so as to properly crimp the contact.
CRIMPER LOCATOR
ANVIL
(a) Right Position
(b) Wrong Position
Figure 3.37 - Right position for satisfactory crimping
3-36
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 3.4.4.2 Assembling of AMP Connector
3. INSTALLATION
After crimping the AMP contacts, assemble the Rese-housing of the AMP connectors. Refer to Figure 3.38.
Insertion
AMP crimping contact
AMP rese-housing Type: 1-1-179958-2

Figure 3.38 - Assembling of AMP connector 3.4.4.3 Office Power Supply Check This procedure verifies the office power for the SRT 1F radio equipment. 3.4.4.4 Tools Required 3.4.4.5 Standard hand tools Digital Multi Meter (DMM)
Procedure 1. Remove the PWR connector from the station interface area (SIA). 2. Set the DMM scale to the 200 VDC range. 3. Connect the positive lead of the DMM to Pin 1 of the connector and the negative lead to Pin 2 of the connector. 4. Verify that the voltage is between 38.4V DC and 57.6V DC for 48V DC system. If it is not, contact the installation team. 5. Disconnect the DMM leads and connect the PWR connector to the SIA.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-37
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.4.5
Frame Grounding
Figure 3.39 shows the Frame Ground connection of the SRT 1F radio equipment rack. The Frame Ground of the equipment rack should be connected to the station ground bus at the right top corner of the SCSU shelf. In addition to the connection, Frame Ground connection between shelf also should be done.
BRU
Frame Ground Connection

- V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN

MSTU 1
[P]
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
-V IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
Frame Ground Connection Frame Ground Connection to
-V IN
BSW 1 TCU X
BSW 2 TCU Y
CN 11
BSW 3
BSW 4 HK 1
BSW 5 HK 2
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
ECU 1
OCC INTF
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
ECU 2
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
-V IN
-V IN
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
CN 75 CN 78
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
CN 72 CN 79
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
CN 73 CN 74 CN 76 CN 77
Figure 3.39 - Frame Ground of the Equipment Rack SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
BB INTF P BBC
BB INTF X
[M1 M1] M1
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M2 M2] M2
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M3 M3] M3
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M4 M4] M4
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M5 M5] M5
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M6 M6] M6
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M7 M7] M7
BB INTF Y
3-38
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.4.6
Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms

The Dry Line Dehydrators and Line Monitors are part of the SRT 1F installation. Refer to the operators handbook for Installation, Acceptance and Turn Up procedures.
3.4.7
Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors

The SMA semi rigid coaxial connectors are pre-formed to exact lengths to establish connection between the branch filter and the MSTU plug-in Adapter. The transmitter output and receiver input are connected to the branching network through the MSTU plug-in Adapter shown in Figure 3.40. Pay attention when fitting or removing the semi rigid coaxial connectors. Use the torque wrench with a 21/Ncm setting. Unscrew each end before trying to remove the connector.
MSTU plug-in Adapter
SMA Connector MN RX IN SD RX IN
TX OUT Top view of MSTU plug-in Adapter
MSTU
Figure 3.40 - MSTU plug-in Adapter and semi rigid coaxial cable connector
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-39
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
MAIN (V)
SD (V)
BRU
CH 1 CH 5 CH 1 CH 5 MAIN-2 RX MAIN-3 RX CH 7 RX BPF CH 1 CH 5
RX BPF
RX BPF
CH 3
CH 7
RX
MAIN-1 RX
MAIN-2 RX
MAIN-3 RX
RX
PROT
PROT
MNRX
SDRX TX
MNRX
SDRX MNRX TX TX
PROT
MAIN-1 RX
MAIN-1 TX
MAIN-2 TX
MAIN-3 TX
TX
CH 3
CH 3
CH 7
RX BPF
TX BPF
TX BPF
SDRX
MNRX
SDRX TX
PROT
MAIN-1
MAIN-2
MAIN-3
MSTU
Figure 3.41 - Semi-rigid Cable connection between BRU and MSTU (Example for 3+1, Alternated Operation)
3-40
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.4.8
Inter shelf Connection for RPS, SV, and DCC

Inter shelf connection shown in Figure 3.42 is necessary for (N+1) radio protection switching (RPS), supervision (SV), and digital communication channel (DCC).
PDU(OPTION)
CN 10 CN 11 CN 12
PDU(OPTION)
CN 10 CN 11 CN 12 CN 9 CN 1 CN 2 CN 3 CN 4 CN 5 CN 6 CN 7 CN 8 CN 9
- V IN
[P]
SCSU
CN 11
- V1 IN
BBIU
OPT INTF 1 or PE INTF 1 OPT INTF 2 or PE INTF 2 OPT INTF 3
nd nd To operate 2 RPS, remove the cables CD304 and CD 308 to the 2 RPS rack.
Note : SCSU of 2nd RPS does not require power supply. Figure 3.42 - Inter shelf Connection for Radio Protection Switching, Supervision, and Digital Communication Channel (DCC)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
CN 1
CN 2
- V IN
CN 3
- V IN
CN 4
CN 5
- V IN
CN 6
BRU
- V IN
CN 7
CN 8
BRU
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
MSTU 1
BSW 1 TCU X BBC BSW 2 TCU Y
- V2 IN
[M1 M1] M1
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
BSW 3 BSW 4 HK 1 OPT INTF 4 or PE INTF 3
[M2 M2] M2
CN 75 CN 78
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
BSW 5 HK 2 OPT INTF 5
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
BSW 7 OCC INTF OPT INTF 6 or PE INTF 4
CN 72 CN 79
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
ECU 1 ECU 2
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
- V2 IN
[P]
MSTU 9
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 10
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 11
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 12
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 13
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 14
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 15
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 16
- V2 IN
BSW 6
BSW 8
BSW 9
BSW 10
BSW 11
BSW 12
BSW 13
BSW 14
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42 CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
CN 53
CN 53
CN 73 CN 74 CN 76 CN 77
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
SCSU
CN 11
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
CD308
CN 73 CN 74 CN 75 CN 78 CN 72 CN 79 CN 76 CN 77
CD308
CD304
OPT INTF 12 or PE INTF 7 OPT INTF 13 OPT INTF 14 or PE INTF 8 OPT INTF 15
BBIU
OPT INTF 16 or PE INTF 9 OPT INTF 17 or PE INTF 10 OPT INTF 18
CD304
OPT INTF 27 or PE INTF 15 OPT INTF 28 OPT INTF 29 or PE INTF 16 OPT INTF 30
[M3 M3] M3
OPT INTF 7
OPT INTF 8 or PE INTF 5
[M4 M4] M5] M4 [M5 M5
OPT INTF 9
OPT INTF 11
OPT INTF 20
OPT INTF 22
OPT INTF 24
OPT INTF 26
BBC
[M6 M6] M6
[M7 M7] M7
[M1 M1] M1
[M2 M2] M2
[M3 M3] M3
[M4 M4] M4
[M5 M5] M5
[M6 M6] M6
[M7 M7] M7
3-41
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.4.9
3.4.9.1
Baseband Signal Cable Connection

STM-1 electrical signal Interface Figure 3.43 shows the STM-1 electrical interface baseband signal connection done on BSW (Baseband Switch) unit front panel. Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are 27CP and line impedance is 75 ohms and unbalanced.
BRU
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
STM-1(156M) CMI IN
MSTU 1
[P]
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
- V2 IN
STM-1(156M) CMI OUT
IN WS-S OUT IN WS-R OUT
SCSU
CN 11
BSW 1 TCU X
BSW 2 TCU Y
Figure 3.43 - STM-1 electrical signal interface baseband signal connection
BSW 3
BSW 4 HK 1
BSW 5 HK 2
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
Wayside Signal IN/OUT
ECU 1
OCC INTF
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
ECU 2
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
Front View of BSW unit

BBIU
3-42
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 3.4.9.2 STM-1 optical signal Interface
3. INSTALLATION
Figure 3.44 shows inter shelf connection of the baseband signal and Figure 3.45 shows the STM-1 optical signal connection between SRT 1F radio equipment and Optical Fiber Transmission equipment done on the PCB of the OPT INTF (Optical signal Interface) unit. Optical Fiber connector is of the FC type and are accessed from the front of the equipment rack.
BRU
BSW 1 BSW 2 BSW3
BSW 7 CMI IN CMI OUT
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
STM-1
MSTU 1
[P]
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
STM-1
CMI IN CMI OUT
- V2 IN
SCSU
CN 11
- V1 IN
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
BSW 1 TCU X
BBIU
OPT INTF P BBC OPT INTF X OPT INTF Y
BSW 2 TCU Y
- V2 IN
BSW 3
[M1 M1] M1
BSW 4 HK 1
MSPSW 1
BSW 5 HK 2
MSPSW 2
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
CN 75 CN 78
BSW 6
MSPSW 3
BSW 7
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
OCC INTF
ECU 1
OCC INTF
MSPSW 4 MSPSW 5
CN 72 CN 79
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
ECU 2
MSPSW 7
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
MSPSW6
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
CN 73 CN 74 CN 76 CN 77
OCC OUT
OPT INTF X
[M2 M2] M2
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
[M3 M3] M3
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
[M4 M4] M4
Figure 3.44 - Inter shelf connection of baseband signal
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
[M5 M5] M5
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
[M6 M6] M6
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
[M7 M7] M7
OPT INTF Y
OCC IN
MSP SW:
3-43
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
BRU
To/from Optical Fiber Transmission Equipment
STM-1
- V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN - V IN
STM-1
[P]
SCSU
CN 11
- V1 IN
OUT
BBIU
CN 75 CN 78
CN 72 CN 79
CN 76 CN 77
[M1 M1] M1
[M2 M2] M2
[M3 M3] M3
[M4 M4] M4
[M5 M5] M5
[M6 M6] M6
[M7 M7] M7
To/from Unit
Front View of OPT INTF unit
Side View of OPT INTF unit
Figure 3.45 - STM-1 connection between SRT 1F radio equipment and Optical Fiber Transmission equipment
3-44
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
IN
MSTU 1
BSW 1 TCU X BSW 2 TCU Y
- V2 IN
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
BSW 3 BSW 4 HK 1
MSPSW 1
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
BSW 5 HK 2
MSPSW 2 MSPSW 3
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
BSW 7 OCC INTF
MSPSW 4 MSPSW 5
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
- V2 IN
BSW 6 OPT INTF Y
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
ECU 1
MSPSW6
ECU 2
MSPSW 7
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
Optical cable Connector
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
CN 73 CN 74
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.4.10
Wayside Signal Cable Connection

Figure 3.46 shows the 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection done on the front panel of the BSW (Baseband Switch) unit. Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are 27CP and line impedance is 75 ohms and unbalanced.
BRU
Front View of BSW unit
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
STM-1(156M) CMI IN
MSTU 1
[P]
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
STM-1(156M) CMI OUT
IN WS-S OUT IN WS-R OUT
- V2 IN
SCSU
CN 11
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
BSW 1 TCU X
BSW 2 TCU Y
BSW 3
BSW 4 HK 1
BSW 5 HK 2
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
BSW 6
BSW 7
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
ECU 1
OCC INTF
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
ECU 2
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
Wayside Signal IN/OUT (HDB3, 75 ohms, unbalance)
BBIU
Wayside Signal IN/OUT(HDB3, 12 ohms, balance) See Chapter 5, section 5.11, PIN assignment
Figure 3.46 - HDB3, 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection
3-45
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.4.11
Inter shelf connection for CO-channel operation

For co-channel operation, inter shelf connection shown in Figure 3.47 or Figure 3.48 are necessary for XPIC operation. Figure 3.47 is applied when that V/H equipment is installed in a separate rack and Figure 3.48 is applied when the V/H equipment is installed in the same rack.
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
OUT
[ 1st Radio Protection System ] [ 2nd Radio Protection System ]

BRU BRU
- V IN
[P ]
MSTU 1
XPIC
IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 2
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 3
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 4
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 5
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 6
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 7
XPIC
IN
OUT
MSTU 8
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 9
XPIC
IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 10
XPIC
IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 11
XPIC
IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 12
XPIC
IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 13
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 14
IN
OUT
MSTU 15
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 16
XPIC
XPIC
IN
SCSU
CN 11
Figure 3.47 - Inter shelf connection for Co-channel operation (V / H equipment installed in separate rack) SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
MSTU 1
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
BSW 3 BSW 4 HK 1
[M M 2] 2
MSTU 3
BSW 5 HK 2
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
BSW 7 OCC INTF
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
- V2 IN
[P ]
MSTU 9
[M M 1] 1
MSTU 10
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 11
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 12
[M M 4] 4
MSTU 13
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 14
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 15
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
- V2 IN
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42 CN 43 CN 44
MSTU 16
No power supply is required for SCSU of 2nd RPS
BSW 6
BSW 8
BSW 9
BSW 10
BSW 11
BSW 12
BSW 13
BSW 14
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
BBIU
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
SCSU
CN 11
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
BBIU
3-46
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
REF I/O
OUT
[ 1st Radio Protection System ] [ 2nd Radio Protection System ]
SCSU
CN 11
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
MSTU 1
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 2
XPIC
IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 3
XPIC
IN
OUT
BRU
- V IN
MSTU 4
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 5
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 6
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 7
XPIC
IN
OUT
MSTU 8
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 9
XPIC
IN
OUT
- V IN
MSTU 10
XPIC
IN
OUT
BRU
- V IN
MSTU 11
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 12
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 13
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 14
XPIC
IN
- V IN
OUT
MSTU 15
OUT
MSTU 16
XPIC
IN
XPIC
IN
XPIC
IN
[P]
MSTU 1
[M1 M1] M1
Figure 3.48 - Inter shelf connection for Co-channel operation (V / H equipment installed in the same rack)
MSTU 2
BSW 3 BSW 4 HK 1
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
BSW 5 HK 2
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
BSW 7 OCC INTF
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
- V2 IN
[P]
MSTU 9
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 10
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 11
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 12
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 13
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 14
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 15
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 16
- V2 IN
No power supply is required for SCSU of 2nd RPS
BSW 6
BSW 8
BSW 9
BSW 10
BSW 11
BSW 12
BSW 13
BSW 14
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42 CN 43 CN 44
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
BBIU
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
SCSU
CN 11
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
BBIU
3-47
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.5
Connector and Connector Pin Assignment

This chapter provides information on the connector and connector pin assignments.
3.5.1
Connectors Layout on Back Wired Board (BWB)

Figure 3.49 shows multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of (7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack and Figure 3.50 shows multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of 2(7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack.
PDU(OPTION)
CN 10 CN 11 CN 12 CN 1
- V IN
CN 2
- V IN
CN 3
- V IN
CN 4
CN 5
- V IN
CN 6
BRU
- V IN
CN 7
CN 8
- V IN
CN 9
- V IN
- V IN
[P]
MSTU 1
BSW 1 BSW 2
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
BSW 3 BSW 4
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
BSW 5 BSW 6
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
BSW 7
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
MSTU 8
- V2 IN
Detail
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 1
CN 3
CN 4
HK 1 HK 2 TCU X TCU Y
OCC INTF
CN 2
CN 4
CN 5
SCSU
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
CN 11
- V1 IN
CN 11
- V2 IN
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
CN 73 CN 74 CN 76 CN 77
CN
BBIU
CN 75 CN 78
CN 72 CN 79
CN
BB INTF P BBC
BB INTF X
[M1 M1] M1
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M2 M2] M2
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M3 M3] M3
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M4 M4] M4
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M5 M5] M5
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M6 M6] M6
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M7 M7] M7
BB INTF Y
Detail
Figure 3.49 - Multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of (7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-48
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
1st Radio Protection System
2nd Radio Protection System
PDU(OPTION)
CN 10 CN 11 CN 12 CN 1
- V IN
PDU(OPTION)
CN 10 CN 11 CN 12 CN 9 CN 1 CN 2 CN 3 CN 4 CN 5 CN 6 CN 7 CN 8 CN 9
CN 2
- V IN
CN 3
- V IN
CN 4
CN 5
- V IN
CN 6
BRU
- V IN
CN 7
CN 8
BRU
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
[P]
SCSU
CN 11
- V1 IN
BBIU
BBC BB INTF P BB INTF X BB INTF Y
Figure 3.50 - Multi-pin connectors layout on the BWB of 2(7+1) SRT 1F radio equipment rack
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
MSTU 1
- V2 IN
[M1 M1] M1
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
BSW 3 BSW 4 HK 1
MSPSW 1
[M2 M2] M2
CN 75 CN 78
MSTU 3
BSW 5 HK 2
MSPSW 2 MSPSW 3
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
BSW 7 OCC INTF
MSPSW 4 MSPSW 5
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
- V2 IN
[P]
MSTU 9
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 10
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 11
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 12
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 13
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 14
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 15
- V1 IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 16
- V2 IN
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42 CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
BSW 6 BB INTF Y
BSW 8
BSW 9
BSW 10
BSW 11
BSW 12
BSW 13
BSW 14
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
CN 72 CN 79
ECU 1
MSPSW6
ECU 2
MSPSW 7
CN 73 CN 74 CN 76 CN 77
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
SCSU
CN 11
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
- V1 IN
-V2 IN
MSPSW 8
MSPSW 9
MSPSW 10
MSPSW 11
MSPSW 12
MSPSW 13
MSPSW 15
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
CN 73 CN 74 CN 76 CN 77
BBIU
BB INTF Y BB INTF X BB INTF Y BBC BB INTF P BB INTF X BB INTF Y
CN 75 CN 78
CN 72 CN 79
BB INTF X
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
BB INTF Y
[M2 M2] M2
[M3 M3] M3
[M4 M4] M4
[M5 M5] M5
[M6 M6] M6
[M7 M7] M7
[M1 M1] M1
[M2 M2] M2
[M3 M3] M3
[M4 M4] M4
[M5 M5] M5
[M6 M6] M6
[M7 M7] M7
* Note : SCSU of 2nd RPS does not require power supply.
3-49
3. INSTALLATION 3.5.1.1 Connectors on the BWB of SCSU Table 3.1 lists all the connectors on the BWB of SCSU. Table 3.1 - Connectors on the BWB of SCSU
CN No. Description Remarks Connector Type
UMN
CN 1 CN 2 CN 3 CN 4 CN 5 CN 6 CN 11 CN 12 CN 13 CN 14 CN 15 CN 16 CN 17 CN 21 CN 22 CN 23 CN 24 CN 31 CN 32 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35 CN 40 CN 41 CN 42 CN 43 CN 44 CN 45
EXT SX EXT SY T4 SX T4 SY T0SX T0 SY WS/UC 1 WS/UC 2 WS/UC 3 WS/UC 4 WS/UC 5 WS/UC 6 WS/UC 7 HK 2 HK 3 HK 4 HK 5 RAB EOW RUC HK 1 OSSI S-INTF 1 S-INTF 2 SSMB 1 SSMB 2 CM-BUS EOW
Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Housekeeping (DI/DO) Housekeeping (DI/DO) Housekeeping (DI/DO) Housekeeping (DI/DO) Rack Alarm BUS Engineering Order Wire Radio User Channel Housekeeping (DI/DO) Operation Support System Serial Interface 1 Serial Interface 2 Synchronous State Message Byte BUS Synchronous State Message Byte BUS Channel Management BUS Engineering Order Wire
27CP coaxial 27CP coaxial 27CP coaxial 27CP coaxial 27CP coaxial 27CP coaxial Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 15 multi-pin Dsub 15 multi-pin Dsub 25 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin DHA80 multi-pin DHA80 multi-pin DHA40 multi-pin DHA40 multi-pin DHA68 multi-pin DHA68 multi-pin
3-50
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 3.5.1.2 Connectors on the BWB of BBIU
3. INSTALLATION
Table 3.2 lists all the connectors on the BWB of BBIU are listed up. Table 3.2 - Connectors on the BWB of BBIU
CN No. Description Remarks Connector Type
CN 65 CN 66 CN 67 CN 68 CN 72 CN 73 CN 74 CN 75 CN 76 CN 77 CN 78 CN 79 CN 80 CN 81
UC 1, 2 UC 3, 4 UC 5, 6 UC 7 EOW IN EOW OUT EOW TERM CMB IN CMB OUT CMB TERM SSMB DCC OCC OUT OCC IN
User Channel (F1 byte) User Channel (F1 byte) User Channel (F1 byte) User Channel (F1 byte) Engineering Order Wire Input Engineering Order Wire Output
Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin Dsub 37 multi-pin DHA68 multi-pin DHA68 multi-pin DHA68 multi-pin
Channel Management BUS IN Channel Management BUS OUT
DHA68 multi-pin DHA68 multi-pin DHA68 multi-pin
Synchronous Status Management Byte BUS Data Communication Channel Occasional signal Output Occasional signal Input
DHA40 multi-pin DHA80 multi-pin 27CP coaxial 27CP coaxial
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-51
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.5.2
Connector PIN assignment for OSSI

Table 3.3 shows the Connector PIN assignment for OSSI.
Use Access Name
Connector No. on BWB
Type of Connector
OSSI
SCSU-CN35
Dsub 37
Table 3.3 - Connector PIN assignment for OSSI

PIN No.
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 OSSCTS B(I) OSSRXC B(I) OSSRTS B(O) OSSRXD B(I) OSSTC2 B(I) OSSTXD B(O) Clear to SEND (B) R element timing (B) Request to SEND (B) RX DATA (B) T element timing (B) TX DATA (B) OSSDCD B(I) OSSDTR B(O) OSSDSR B(I) R Carrier Detected (B) Data Term. Ready (B) Data Set Ready (B) OSSTC1 B(O) B-B element timing (B)
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
SG
Remarks
Signal Ground
SG
Signal Ground
OSSTC1 A(O)
B-B element timing (A)
OSSDCD A( I ) OSSDTR A(O) OSSDSR A( I )
Carrier Detected (A) Data Term. Ready (A) Data Set Ready (A)
OSSCTS A( I ) OSSRXC A( I ) OSSRTS A(O) OSSRXD A( I ) OSSTC2 A( I ) OSSTXD A(O)
Clear to SEND (A) R element timing (A) Request to SEND (A) RX DATA (A) T element timing (A) TX DATA (A)
FG
Frame Ground
37
19
20
3-52
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.5.3
Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port 1

Table 3.4 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK1.
Use Access Name
Type of Connector
HK1
SCSU-CN34
Dsub 37
Table 3.4 - Connector PIN assignment for HK1

PIN No.
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 DI-8 DI-6 DI-4 DI-2 Housekeeping IN-8 Housekeeping IN-6 Housekeeping IN-4 Housekeeping IN-2 DO-4N DO-3N DO-2N DO-1N HK-Common Housekeeping OUT-4N Housekeeping OUT-3N Housekeeping OUT-2N Housekeeping OUT-1N HK Common Ground
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
Remarks
DO-4C DO-3C DO-2C DO-1C HK-Common SDA SG SD AGC AGC SG AGC MON DI-7 DI-5 DI-3 DI-1 FG
Housekeeping OUT-4C Housekeeping OUT-3C Housekeeping OUT-2C Housekeeping OUT-1C HK Common Ground Signal Ground for Monitor SD AGC monitor (W1) Signal Ground for Monitor AGC monitor (W1) Housekeeping IN-7 Housekeeping IN-5 Housekeeping IN-3 Housekeeping IN-1 Frame Ground
37
19
20
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-53
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.5.4

Use Access Name
Type of Connector
HK2
SCSU-CN21
Dsub 37

PIN No.
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 HK1 DO-8N HK1 DO-7N HK1 DO-6N HK1 DO-5N HK1 DO-4N HK1 DO-3N HK1 DO-2N HK1 DO-1N HK-Common HK1 DI-16 HK1 DI-14 HK1 DI-12 HK1 DI-10 HK1 DI-8 HK1 DI-6 HK1 DI-4 HK1 DI-2 Housekeeping OUT-8N Housekeeping OUT-7N Housekeeping OUT-6N Housekeeping OUT-5N Housekeeping OUT-4N Housekeeping OUT-3N Housekeeping OUT-2N Housekeeping OUT-1N HK Common Ground Housekeeping IN-16 Housekeeping IN-14 Housekeeping IN-12 Housekeeping IN-10 Housekeeping IN-8 Housekeeping IN-6 Housekeeping IN-4 Housekeeping IN-2
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
Remarks
HK1 DO-8C HK1 DO-7C HK1 DO-6C HK1 DO-5C HK1 DO-4C HK1 DO-3C HK1 DO-2C HK1 DO-1C HK-Common HK1 DI-15 HK1 DI-13 HK1 DI-11 HK1 DI-9 HK1 DI-7 HK1 DI-5 HK1 DI-3 HK1 DI-1 FG
Housekeeping OUT-8C Housekeeping OUT-7C Housekeeping OUT-6C Housekeeping OUT-5C Housekeeping OUT-4C Housekeeping OUT-3C Housekeeping OUT-2C Housekeeping OUT-1C HK Common Ground Housekeeping IN-15 Housekeeping IN-13 Housekeeping IN-11 Housekeeping IN-9 Housekeeping IN-7 Housekeeping IN-5 Housekeeping IN-3 Housekeeping IN-1 Frame Ground
37
19
20
3-54
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.5.5

Use Access Name
Type of Connector
HK3
SCSU-CN22
Dsub 37

PIN No.
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 HK1 DO-16N HK1 DO-15N HK1 DO-14N HK1 DO-13N HK1 DO-12N HK1 DO-11N HK1 DO-10N HK1 DO-9N HK-Common HK1 DI-32 HK1 DI-30 HK1 DI-28 HK1 DI-26 HK1 DI-24 HK1 DI-22 HK1DI-20 HK1DI-18 Housekeeping OUT-16N Housekeeping OUT-15N Housekeeping OUT-14N Housekeeping OUT-13N Housekeeping OUT-12N Housekeeping OUT-11N Housekeeping OUT-10N Housekeeping OUT-9N HK Common Ground Housekeeping IN-32 Housekeeping IN-30 Housekeeping IN-28 Housekeeping IN-26 Housekeeping IN-24 Housekeeping IN-22 Housekeeping IN-20 Housekeeping IN-18
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
Remarks
37
19
20
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-55
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.5.6

Use Access Name
Type of Connector
HK4
SCSU-CN23
Dsub 37

PIN No.
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
Remarks
37
19
20
3-56
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.5.7

Use Access Name
Type of Connector
HK5
SCSU-CN24
Dsub 37

PIN No.
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Descriptio n
Remarks
37
19
20
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-57
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.5.8
Connector PIN assignment for Radio User Channel

Table 3.9 shows the Connector PIN assignment for RUC.
Use Access Name
Type of Connector
RUC
SCSU-CN33
Dsub 25
Table 3.9 - Connector PIN assignment for RUC

PIN No.
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
SG U1R CKN (O) U1R CKP (O) SG U1R DN ( I ) U1R DP ( I ) SG U1T CKN (O) U1T CKP (O) SG U1T DN (O) U1T DP (O) FG
Remarks
Signal Ground CH1 R CLK N (OUT) CH1 R CLK P (OUT) Signal Ground CH1 R DATA N (IN) 4WR CH1 R DATA P (IN) 4WR Signal Ground CH1 T CLK N (OUT) CH1 T CLK P (OUT) Signal Ground CH1 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS Frame Ground
SG U2R CKN (O) U2R CKP (O) SG U2R DN ( I ) U2R DP ( I ) SG U2T CKN (O) U2T CKP (O) SG U2T DN (O) U2T DP (O)
Signal Ground CH2 R CLK N (OUT) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) Signal Ground CH2 T DATA N (IN) 4WR CH2 T DATA P (IN) 4WR Signal Ground CH2 T CLK N (OUT) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) Signal Ground CH2 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS CH2 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS
25
13
14
3-58
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.5.9
Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm BUS

Table 3.10 shows the Connector PIN assignment for PAB.
Use Access Name
Type of Connector
RAB
SCSU-CN31
Dsub 15
Table 3.10 - Connector PIN assignment for RAB

PIN No.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
COMMON VIS MN AUD MN VIS MJ AUD MJ VIS CR AUD CR FG
Remarks
*ACO IN ACO IN NE ALM-N NE ALM-C RAB-MNT VIS WR AUD WR
ACO Ground line Alarm Cut Off IN NE alarm (N) NE alarm Maintenance Visible Warning Audible Warning
Visible Miner alarm Audible Miner alarm Visible Major alarm Audible Major alarm Visible Critical alarm Audible Critical alarm Frame Ground
15
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-59
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.5.10
Connector PIN assignment for EOW

Table 3.11 shows the Connector PIN assignment for PAB.
Use Access Name
Type of Connector
EOW
SCSU-CN32
Dsub 15
Table 3.11 - Connector PIN assignment for EOW

PIN No.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
E2 IN T (IN) E2-OUT T (OUT) CALL2-C SG CALL1-C E1-IN T(IN) E1-OUT T (O) FG
Remarks
4WR E2ch T 4WS E2ch T Calling E2 common Signal Ground Calling E1 common 4WR E1ch T 4WS E1ch T Frame Ground
E2 IN R(IN) E2-OUT R(OUT) CALL2-N SG CALL1-N E1-IN R(IN) E1-OUT R(O)
4WR E2ch R 4WS E2ch R Calling E2-N-line Signal Ground Calling E1-N-line 4WR E1ch R 4WS E1ch R
15 9
3-60
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.5.11
Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

Table 3.12 shows the Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC.
Use Access Name

WS/UC 1 WS/UC 2 WS/UC 3 WS/UC 4 WS/UC 5 WS/UC 6 WS/UC 7

SCSU-CN11 SCSU-CN12 SCSU-CN13 SCSU-CN14 SCSU-CN15 SCSU-CN16 SCSU-CN17
Type of Connector
Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37
Table 3.12 - Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

PIN No.
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
SG SG SUC LRCN (O) SUC LRCP (O) SUC LRDN ( I ) SUC LRDP ( I ) SG SG WSR OUT N (O) WSR OUT P (O) WSR IN N ( I ) WSR IN P ( I ) SG SG WSS OUT N (O) WSS OUT P (O) WSS IN N ( I ) WSS IN P ( I ) SG
Remarks
Signal Ground Signal Ground LINE side RCLK (N) LINE side RCLK (P) LINE side RDATA(N) LINE side RDATA(P) Signal Ground Signal Ground RFCOH WS OUT (N) RFCOH WS OUT (P) RFCOH WS IN (N) RFCOH WS IN (P) Signal Ground Signal Ground SOH WS OUT (N) SOH WS OUT (P) SOH WS IN (N) SOH WS IN (P) Signal Ground
SG SG SUC RTCN (O) SUC RTCP (O) SUC RTDN (O) SUC RTDP (O) SG SG SUC RRCN (O) SUC RRCP (O) SUC RRDN ( I ) SUC RRDP ( I ) SG SG SUC LTCN (O) SUC LTCP (O) SUC LTDN (O) SUC LTDP (O)
Signal Ground Signal Ground RADIO side TCLK (N) RADIO side TCLK (P) RADIO side TDATA(N) RADIO side TDATA(P) Signal Ground Signal Ground RADIO side RCLK (N) RADIO side RCLK (P) RADIO side RDATA(N) RADIO side RDATA(P) Signal Ground Signal Ground LINE side TCLK (N) LINE side TCLK (P) LINE side TDATA (N) LINE side TDATA (P)
37
19
20
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-61
3. INSTALLATION
UMN
3.5.12
Connector PIN assignment for User Channel

Table 3.13 shows the Connector PIN assignment for UC.
Use Access Name
Type of Connector
UC 1, 2 UC 3, 4 UC 5, 6 UC 7
BBIU-CN65 BBIU-CN66 BBIU-CN67 BBIU-CN68
Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37 Dsub 37
Table 3.13 - Connector PIN assignment for UC

PIN No.
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Description
Remarks
PIN No.
19 SG SG 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
Remarks
Signal Ground Signal Ground LINE RX DATA (N) 1 LINE RX DATA (P) 1 LINE RX CLK (N) 1 LINE RX CLK (P) 1 LINE TX DATA (N) 1 LINE TX DATA (P) 1 LINE TX CLK (N) 1 LINE TX CLK (P) 1 RADIO RX DATA (N) 1 RADIO RX DATA (P) 1 RADIO RX CLK (N) 1 RADIO RX CLK (P) 1 RADIO TX DATA (N) 1 RADIO TX DATA (P) 1 RADIO TX CLK (N) 1 RADIO TX CLK (P) 1 Signal Ground
SG LRXUCDT N2 LRXUCDT P2 LRXUCCLK N2 LRXUCCLK P2 LTXUCDT N2 LTXUCDT P2 LTXUCCLK N2 LTXUCCLK P2 RRXUCDT N2 RRXUCDT P2 RRXUCCLK N2 RRXUCCLK P2 RTXUCDT N2 RTXUCDT P2 RTXUCCLK N2 RTXUCCLK P2 SG
Signal Ground LINE RX DATA (N) 2 LINE RX DATA (P) 2 LINE RX CLK (N) 2 LINE RX CLK (P) 2 LINE TX DATA (N) 2 LINE TX DATA (P) 2 LINE TX CLK (N) 2 LINE TX CLK (P) 2 RADIO RX DATA (N) 2 RADIO RX DATA (P) 2 RADIO RX CLK (N) 2 RADIO RX CLK (P) 2 RADIO TX DATA (N) 2 RADIO TX DATA (P) 2 RADIO TX CLK (N) 2 RADIO TX CLK (P) 2 Signal Ground
LRXUCDT N1 LRXUCDT P1 LRXUCCLK N1 LRXUCCLK P1 LTXUCDT N1 LTXUCDT P1 LTXUCCLK N1 LTXUCCLK P1 RRXUCDT N1 RRXUCDT P1 RRXUCCLK N1 RRXUCCLK P1 RTXUCDT N1 RTXUCDT P1 RTXUCCLK N1 RTXUCCLK P1 SG
37
19
20
3-62
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
3. INSTALLATION
3.5.13
Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock

Coaxial Connectors, CN 1 to CN 6, located on BWB of the SCSU are used for IN/OUT of the External Synchronization Signal, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can be set through LCT.
Table 3.14 - Coaxial Connectors for External Synchronization Signal

CN No. Description Remarks
CN 1 CN 2 CN 3 CN 4 CN 5
EXT SX EXT SY T4 SX T4 SY T0 SX
Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system
CN 6
T0 SY
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
3-63
UMN
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP
ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

4.1 ACCEPTANCE OF THE SRT 1F
Acceptance tests are performed to ensure that proper installation procedures detailed in Chapter 3, have been followed. Acceptance tests verify the following: Proper power wiring has been provided to the bay Equipment shelves are free of defects or damage
Factory-wired power circuits are properly connected. The acceptance tests generally assume: Accurate and concise system designations and office records are available to properly identify systems and equipment Any faults found and not corrected during testing are referred to the installation group responsible The test equipment required is available, properly tested and working correctly
4.1.1
Perform Overall Visual Inspection

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Locate the SRT 1F rack and bay that will house the equipment. Place yourself facing the rack. Check that no slide-in units are installed. Remove any units that are installed. Check that the shelves are secure and free of defects or damage. Check that all electrical connectors inside the shelves are properly secured and aligned in the shelf slots. Check that there are no broken, bent or mis-aligned contacts in the connectors. Check that there are no mis-aligned, dented or twisted shelves. Check that there is no broken or damaged (connectors, wiring, back wired boards, etc.). equipment
Check that all cabling and wiring is terminated and secured in place. Check that the wiring from the central office battery supply is connected to the power connector on the SRT 1F rack. Check that the plug from the office alarm system is connected to the SRT 1F rack alarm bus connector (CN31 on BWB of SCSU). Check that the SRT 1F rack connections to the equipment outside of the bay have been made. Check that the feeder connections are properly terminated. Record the inspection results
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-1
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP Note: Report any problems to the installation group.
UMN
4.1.2
Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack

This procedure lists the steps required to check the incoming power supply to the SRT 1F rack. Before beginning this procedure, turn on the main power supply and check that the fuse assigned to the shelf is inserted properly.
4.1.2.1
Test Equipment Required Digital Multimeter (DMM) or equivalent.
4.1.2.2
Procedure 1. 2. 3. Turn off the all No-Fuse Breakers on the units and shelves. Unplug all the power connectors from all the units and shelves equipped on the rack. Confirm the voltage between the 48V and Battery return terminals in the power connector. 38.4 V DC and 57.6 V DC for 48V system If OK continue with Step 5. If NO report the problem to the installation group. Re plug in all the power connectors. Turn on all the No-Fuse Breakers on the units and shelves.
4. 5. 6.
Violet
Minus
Power cable 48 V
Plus
Black
AMP connector: 1-79958-2
Figure 4.1 - SRT 1F PWR Connector
4-2
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.2
Installation of the SRT 1F Slide-in Units

This chapter provides instructions to install the various units into the SRT 1F rack.
4.2.1
Warning Messages
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of equipment.
4.2.1.1
Laser Warning WARNING Never look into the end of an optical cable or fiber pigtail. PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser radiation is present. Never handle exposed fiber with bare hands or permit contact with the body. Fiber fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect and remove. Figure 4.2 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting and receiving units: DANGER Invisible laser radiation from connectors when uncoupled. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. Figure 4.2 - Laser Warning Labels
4.2.1.2
Electrostatic Discharge Warning CAUTION Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during installation, removal, storage or shipment. Such units have electrostatic discharge (ESD) warning labels attached (see Figure 4.3) and require special care in handling and storage. The following precautions must be strictly observed:
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-3
UMN
Always wear a wrist strap connected to earth when handling slide-in units. The wrist strap must have a minimum resistance of 250 k. Before using the wrist strap, check for continuity, shorts and minimum resistance value. Replace the wrist strap if it fails any of these checks. Hold only the edge of the slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on the units. Transport or store slide-in units in the special bags the units were originally shipped in. Always fold the open end of the bag over and secure with tape. Return units to Siemens in special bags and original shipping containers.
Figure 4.3 - ESD Warning Labels
4-4
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.2.2
Slide-In Installation Procedures

This procedure assumes that: 1. The equipment rack has been installed in accordance with local procedures. 2. The SRT 1F rack has been installed and connected according to the procedure described in par. Connector and Connector Pin Assignment. 3. The procedures described in par. 4.1, Acceptance of SRT 1F rack have been performed. This procedure is provided as a guide to equipping the SRT 1F rack.
4.2.3
Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units

This section details the procedures to be followed for the insertion and removal of all slide-in units. Warning During replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with a slow, but firm motion. They should not be pushed quickly into the slot. Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimise power surges during unit replacement. A slow insertion method will ensure that the slide-in units are not damaged.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-5
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.2.3.1 Inserting a Slide-In Unit
UMN
1. If required, set the option switches and straps on the unit to customer requirements. These settings are detailed in the par. 4.8.2. 2. Ensure the card extractor levers are fully open, then slowly press the unit into the correct mounting slot. Carefully close the top and bottom extractor levers with both hands, until they latch, to set the unit in the backboard connectors. 3. The backboard connectors are keyed to accept only the card assigned to that position. See Figure 4.4.
Figure 4.4 - Inserting a Slide-in Unit Attention Do not slam the unit into the shelf. It may damage connectors.
4-6
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 4.2.3.2 Removing a Slide-In Unit
1. Locate the slide-in unit to be removed. 2. Gently pull open the top and bottom extractor levers until the slide-in unit is free from the rear connector (see Figure 4.5). If the unit is hard to remove, gently push the card in, then raise the extractor levers. Do not force the levers open. See Figure 4.5. 3. Carefully remove the slide-in unit from the mounting shelf.
Figure 4.5 - Removing a Slide-in Unit Figure 4.6 shows a detailed description of the extraction levers.
Figure 4.6 - Detail of an Extractor Lever
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-7
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.2.3.3 Removing an Optical Unit 1. 2. 3.
UMN
Gently pull the top and bottom extractor levers out with both hands until the unit is pulled free from the backboard connector. Slowly pull the unit until it is stopped by the card stopper located at the bottom edge of the card. Disconnect the optical fiber cords if they are connected to the unit. An instruction label is located on the Optical Interface unit. This label is visible when the unit is partially removed. Fit the protection caps to the optical fiber connectors and on the unit if they are not already fitted with the protection caps. Lift the metal spring on the card stopper and remove the unit completely out of the shelf. See Figure 4.7.
4. 5.
Note:
Care must be taken when removing units with optical fiber cables connected to prevent undue stress being placed on the fiber cables. See par Optical Circuits, Fiber Optic Cables and Jumpers for optical fiber cable handling procedures.
01570
Figure 4.7 - Removing an Optical Unit
4-8
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.2.4
Installing the MSTU Unit

1. Slide the MSTU unit into its appropriate position in the MSTU shelf with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the Figure 3.14 of par. Shelf Configuration. All of signal connections such as TX output power, RX input signal, Baseband signal, and DC power supply, are plugged in. 2. Fasten the front locking screws finger tight. Attention When you install the MSTU unit: Do not slam the unit. Tighten two locking screws at top and bottom lightly pressing the middle of the unit. alternately while
4.2.5
Installing SCSU Unit

1. Slide the SCSU unit, SV, BSW, HK, TCU, ECU, into its appropriate position in the SCSU shelf with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the Figure 3.15 of par. Shelf Configuration. 2. Confirm that it has been firmly plugged in.
4.2.6
Installing BBIU Unit

1. Slide the BBIU unit, PE INTF, BBC, MSP SW into its appropriate position in the BBIU shelf with a slow but firm motion. Refer to the Figure 3.16 of par. Shelf Configuration. 2. Confirm that it has been firmly plugged in.
4.2.7
4.2.7.1
Installing the Optical Interface (OPT INTF) Unit

Procedure 1. Slide the optical interface unit into its appropriate position in the appropriate shelf with a slow but firm motion. 2. Remove the protective cap from the fiber patch cord. 3. Insert the fiber patch cords to their respective In and Out positions.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-9
UMN
4.3
SRT 1F Acceptance and Turn-Up Tests

This chapter outlines the Acceptance and Turn-Up tests required to commission the SRT 1F.
4.3.1
Warning Messages
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety of all personnel and the protection of the equipment.
4.3.1.1
Laser Warning WARNING Never look into the end of an optical cable or fiber pigtail. PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser radiation is present. Never handle exposed fiber with bare hands or permit contact with the body. Fiber fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect and remove. Figure 4.8 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting and receiving units: DANGER Invisible laser radiation from connectors when uncoupled. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. Figure 4.8 - Laser Warning Labels
4.3.1.2
Inserting Plugin Units CAUTION During installation or replacement, seat all slide-in units with a slow but firm action. Do not push them quickly into a slot. Many slide-in units have longer power connector pins to minimise power surges during installation. Insert the slide-in units slowly to avoid damage. Refer to par. 4.2.3 Insertion and Removal of Slide-In Units for unit installation and removal procedures.
4-10
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 4.3.1.3 Electrostatic Discharge Warning
CAUTION Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during installation, removal, storage or shipment. Such units have electrostatic discharge (ESD) warning labels attached (see Figure 4.9) and require special care in handling and storage. The following precautions must be strictly observed: Always wear a wrist strap connected to earth when handling plug-in units. The wrist strap must have a minimum resistance of 250 k. Before using the wrist strap, check for continuity, shorts and minimum resistance value. Replace the wrist strap if it fails any of these checks. Hold only the edge of the slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on the units. Transport or store slide-in units in the special bags the units were originally shipped in. Always fold the open end of the bag over and secure with tape. Return units to Siemens in special bags and original shipping containers.
Figure 4.9 - ESD Warning Labels
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-11
UMN
4.3.2
SRT 1F In-Station, Inter-Station and End to End Tests

Manual Reference
Par. 4.5.1 Par. 4.5.2 Par. 4.5.3 Par. 4.5.4 Par. 4.5.5 Par. 4.5.6 Par. 4.5.7 Par. 4.5.8 Par. 4.5.9 Par. 4.5.10
Task Name
In Station Tests
Note
Hardware Settings Software Settings Transmit Local OSC Frequency Transmit Output Power Level Transmit Spectrum AGC Range Optical Output Power MAX / MIN Receive (RX) Level External Clock Rack Alarm Test
Inter- Station Tests
RX Signal Level IF- IF Test IF DADE Test ATPC

End to End Station Tests
Par. 4.6.1 Par. 4.6.2 Par. 4.6.3 Par. 4.6.4
DCC Test Radio Protection (RPS) Switch Wayside Signal Transmission Test BER Characteristics Test Stability Test (Residual BER) Sync Source Switching MSP Switching
Par. 4.7.1 Par. 4.7.2 Par. 4.7.3 Par. 4.7.4 Par. 4.7.5 Par. 4.7.6 Par. 4.7.7
4-12
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.3.3
Test Equipment Required

The following test equipment is required to carry out the commissioning tests: RF power meter with 50 and 75 leads Spectrum Analyzer Network Analyzer with sweep generator or equivalent Microwave link analyzer (70 MHz) Variable attenuator for RF Miscellaneous RF / IF cables and accessories STM-1 transmission analyzer Variable optical attenuator with SC connectors connectors with 2FC/PC to SC patch cords) (or FC/PC
Optical power meters with SC connector (or FC/PC connector with one FC/PC to FC/PC patch cords) Frequency counter for RF.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-13
UMN
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
Waveguide and Antenna Alignment Tests

Waveguide Sweeping
Procedure for Return Loss Measurement
Sweeper
Network Analyzer
Antenna
Detector Divider Detector
Waveguide Adapter
Directional Coupler
Waveguide Waveguide Transducer
Figure 4.10 - Return Loss Measurement 1. Connect the test equipment to the Waveguide as shown in Figure 4.10. (a) (b) The output of the sweep generator connects to the input of the divider. One output of the divider connects to the directional coupler and the other port of the divider connects via a detector to the network analyzer reference input. The output (forward) connection of the directional coupler connects to the waveguide adapter The reflected port of the coupler connects via a detector to the input of the network analyzer.
(c) (d)
2. Calibrate the network analyzer (cal menu) using the waveguide short. 3. Configure the network analyzer for a sweep range of the allocated radio frequency band. 4. Attach the waveguide transition to the waveguide adapter and read the reflected power directly from the display on the network analyzer. The waveguide transition must be tuned to achieve a basically flat response (as close as possible to flat), of less than 20 dBm (theoretical value is 20 to 40 dBm). Refer to Table 4.1 for theoretical return loss calculation data. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-14
UMN
NOTE: When sweeping waveguide on the drum, a sliding load must be inserted into the open end of the waveguide to form a temporary termination (simulation of the antenna).
Table 4.1 - Theoretical return loss calculation data
Return Loss(dB) 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0 21.0 22.0 23.0 24.0 25.0 26.0 27.0 28.0 29.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 Reflection Coefficient (%) 19.95 17.78 15.85 14.13 12.59 11.22 10.00 8.93 7.943 7.079 6.310 5.563 5.012 4.467 3.981 3.548 3.162 1.778 1.000 .05623 VSWR 1.50 1.43 1.38 1.33 1.29 1.25 1.222 1.196 1.173 1.152 1.135 1.119 1.106 1.094 1.083 1.074 1.065 1.036 1.020 1.011
Conversion Formulas Return Loss: Reflection Coefficient: RL = 20log() = (VSWR 1) (VSWR + 1)
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio: VSWR = (1+) (1)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-15
UMN
4.4.2
Antenna Alignment
1. Align the antenna in both planes according to the site drawings (elevation angle will have to be calculated from the height above sea level). If site data is not available, adjust the antenna for 0 elevation. 2. Pan the antenna in the horizontal plane and have a second party to check the RX or AGC voltage (using a spectrum analyzer) for the distant sites signature. When the signature is detected, pan the antenna through the peak signal level and locate the first minima to the left and right of the peak. Note the number of turns of the adjusting screw between the minima, actual peak signal is EXACTLY half way between the two minima. 3. Pan the antenna in the vertical plane in the same manner as above, when complete lock the antenna panning bars and secure.
4.4.2.1
AGC Current Monitoring AGC current of Main 1 channel (W1 CH) Main/SD receiver can be monitored through the connector CN34 of SCSU for antenna alignment and future troubleshooting. Table 4.2 - AGC Current Monitoring Terminal
19 Pin No. 9 8 7 6 CN34 of SCSU for HK1 Name SDA SG SD AGC AGC SG AGC MON Function Signal Ground for Monitor SD AGC monitor (W1) Signal Ground for Monitor AGC monitor (W1)
37
20
CN34 of SCSU accommodates housekeeping supervisory/control terminals in addition to AGC monitoring.
(external)
4-16
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 4.4.2.2 Antenna XPIC Optimization
1. Connect a spectrum analyzer to the Horizontal waveguide, look for the signature of the distant site, the level should be at least 30 dB below the received signal level of the Vertical polarization. Typically, the receive level will be 35 dBm therefore the cross polar receive level should be 65 dB or less. 2. Rotate the feed point on the antenna ( both at the local and remote sites ) to achieve maximum cross polar discrimination, the preferred level is > 35 dB (antenna specification for HPX10-44D is > 30 dB). 3. Lock the feed mounting hub after achieving maximum cross polar discrimination.
4.4.3
Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms

The Dry Line Dehydrators and Line Monitors are part of the SRT 1F installation. Refer to the operators handbook for Installation, Acceptance and Turn-Up procedures.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-17
UMN
4.5
SRT 1F In-Station Performance Tests

This chapter provides instructions for In Station Testing of the SRT 1F radio equipment.
4.5.1
4.5.1.1
Hardware Settings
Default Values This section describes each hardware setting for the SRT 1F radio. These hardware settings are used only for Siemens factory option.These hardware settings should not be touched unless otherwise specified.
Note:
Report any problems to the installation group.
4.5.2
4.5.2.1
Provisioning (Software Settings)

Default Values These provisioning items allow the user to make permanent changes in the NE. Do not change these provisioning settings unless otherwise specified.
Note:
Caution:
Default values displayed on LCT screens are initial setting values for hardware/software design, design, but not for your system setting. If you select Default values on a LCT screen accidentally, the system might not function properly.
4-18
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.5.3
Transmit (TX) Local OSC Frequency

This test is to check the TX local OSC frequency of MSTU unit.
4.5.3.1
Equipment Required HP5342A Frequency counter or equivalent LCT (Local terminal)
4.5.3.2
Specification Tolerance Within 10 ppm.
BRU
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
[P]
SCSU
CN 11
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
MSTU 1
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
BSW 3 BSW 4 HK 1
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
BSW 5 HK 2
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
BSW 7 OCC INTF
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
-V IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
ON OFF POWER ON/OFF
-V IN
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
Frequency Counter
BSW 6
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
BBIU
Figure 4.11 - TX Local Frequency Measurement
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
TX F MON
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
4-19
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.5.3.3 Test Procedure 1. Allow the frequency counter at least 30 minutes to warm up.
UMN
2. The BAND SELECT SW on the frequency counter shall be set to the specified frequency band (RF band). 3. Set up the test circuit as shown in Figure 4.11. 4. Record the TX local carrier frequency results. 5. Compare the results with Table 4.3.
Note:
Table 4.3 - TX Local OSC Frequency for example (5 GHz Band)

RF CH No RF Frequency (MHz) LO Frequency (MHz) Tolerance (kHz) 10 ppm 35.9 36.3 36.7 37.1 37.5 37.9 38.3 38.9 39.3 39.7 40.1 40.5 40.9 41.3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4430.0 4470.0 4510.0 4550.0 4590.0 4630.0 4670.0 4730.0 4770.0 4810.0 4850.0 4890.0 4930.0 4970.0
3586.0 3626.0 3666.0 3706.0 3746.0 3786.0 3826.0 3886.0 3926.0 3966.0 4006.0 4046.0 4086.0 4126.0
Note: Other radio frequency should be referred to the par. Frequency Plan and Antenna System.
4-20
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.5.4
Transmit Output Power Level

This test is to check the output power of the TX unit.
4.5.4.1
Equipment Required HP436A/HP8481A Power meter with sensor or equivalent. HP8491A Fixed attenuator (30dB) or equivalent. LCT
4.5.4.2
Specification TX output power TX output power TX output power +32 dBm 1 dB for 4 GHz to L8 GHz band +29 dBm 1 dB for 11 GHz band +27 dBm 1 dB for 13 GHz band
4.5.4.3
Test Procedure
BRU
Top view of MSTU Adapter
SMA Connector MN RX IN SD RX IN
PSW PSW PSW PSW
TX OUT
T LO
T LO
T LO
T LO
SCSU
ATT 30 dB
POWER METER
+30 ~ -30 dBm / 50
BBIU
Figure 4.12 - TX Output Power Measurement
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-21
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP TX Output Power Measurement Procedure 1. Turn off power SW of the MSTU. 2. Remove the RF OUT cable
UMN
3. Connect power meter into the RF OUT. If the maximum range of the power meter is less than the rated output power level of the TX, insert fixed and calibrated attenuator between the TX output and the power meter. 4. Turn on power SW of the MSTU. 5. Read the power meter indication. 6. If the measured power is out of the rated level, log-on LCT. 7. Go to Status/ControlMaintenance Radio InterfaceChange Maintenance State. 8. Set the MSTU under test in Maintenance State 9. Go to Transmit Power Adjustment. 10. Control UP-DOWN button to set the rated output power level(*). 11. Log off LCT. (*) This command should be used carefully and only for adjustment 1 dB TX Output Power Monitoring Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Log on LCT to the SRT 1F. Go to Status ControlAnalog MonitorDisplay Current Level Request the latest data. Confirm the displayed data. When the power level is out of the rated power 3 dB, TX alarm will be reported.
Note:
4-22
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.5.5
Transmit Spectrum
This test checks the TX Spectrum
4.5.5.1
Equipment Required Spectrum Analyzer.

dB + 10 + 1.0 64 QAM , 40 M H z spacing 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40 - 50 - 60 - 70 - 80 42.5MHz - 65 dB 27.5MHz - 35 dB 17.5 MHz + 1 dB
4.5.5.2
Specification
10
15
20 25 30 35 RF Frequency (MHz)
40
45
50
dB + 10 + 1.0 0 - 10 - 20 - 30 - 40 - 50 - 60 - 70 - 80 31.5 MHz - 65 dB 21 MH z - 35 dB 13 MH z + 1 dB 128 QAM , 28, 29, 30 M H z spacing
10
15
20 25 30 35 RF Frequency (MHz)
40
45
50
Figure 4.13 - Transmitter Output Spectrum
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-23
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.5.5.3 Test Procedure
UMN
1. Turn off all MSTU Power SWs. 2. Remove the TX output cable (thick line on Figure 4.14) from the circulator on the TX BPF in BRU unit. 3. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the circulator output. 4. Turn on the Power SW of the MTSU under test. 5. Compare the results to the specification (use Delta markers or mask) 6. Turn off the Power SW for next channel measurement. 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 for other channels 8. Restore the connections. 9. Turn on all MSTU power SWs.
Note:
MSTU Front View Example of detail configuration of BRU for 1+1, with SD System
MAIN (V)
Transduser
SD (V)
MAIN (V)
Transduser
SD (V)
B R U
Circulator Dummy Load
B R U
Circulator
CH 1
CH 1
CH 1
RX BPF
RX BPF
CH 3
CH 3
CH 3
RX BPF
TX BPF
TX BPF
ON OFF
MAIN-1 SD RX PROT SD RX PROT SD RX MAIN-1 TX MAIN-1 TX PROT RX PROT RX PROT TX PROT TX
POWER ON/OFF
TX F MON
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
Figure 4.14 - Set-up of Transmit Spectrum Measurement
4-24
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
MAIN-1 SD RX
MAIN-1 RX
MAIN-1 RX
CH 3
CH 3
CH 3
RX BPF
CH 1
CH 1
CH 1
UMN
4.5.6
Receiver (RX) AGC Range

This test is to check the AGC range of MAIN RX and SD RX independently. This test should be carried out after the IF output level test, and for that reason the IF output test has been included.
4.5.6.1
Equipment Required 0 to 80 dB RF attenuator and coaxial cables for RF and IF. HP436A/HP8483A Power meter with sensor or equivalent LCT
4.5.6.2
Test Procedure 1. Using LCT set the AGC to ON 2. Connect the power meter to the RX IF MAIN MON 3. Check (adjust if required) the IF level. (- 10 dBm 1 dB). 4. Connect the attenuator between the MAIN RF input and the MAIN RF output of BRU. 5. Adjust for the minimum attenuation. 6. Measure the RSL with the power meter. 7. Adjust the attenuator slowly increasing the attenuation until the specified RSL (-76 dBm for 64 QAM and - 74 dBm for 128 QAM). 8. Confirm that the IF level remains within the limits (- 10 dBm 1 dB). 9. Connect the power meter to the RX IF PROT MON. 10. Check (adjust if required) the IF level. (- 10 dBm 1 dB). 11. Connect the attenuator between the MAIN RF input and the MAIN RF output of BRU. 12. Adjust for the minimum attenuation. 13. Measure the RSL with the power meter. 14. Adjust the attenuator slowly increasing the attenuation until the specified RSL (-76 dBm for 64 QAM and - 74 dBm for 128 QAM). 15. Confirm that the IF level remains within the limits (- 10 dBm 1 dB). 16. Record the results in your Data Recording Forms. 17. Restore the connections.
Note:
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-25
UMN
From Main Antenna
From SD Antenna
MAIN (V)
Transducer
SD (V)
B
Circulator
R
Dummy Load
CH 1
CH 3
RX BPF
TX BPF
SD IF OUT PROT RX
ON
CH 3
CH 3
RX BPF
CH 1
CH 1
POWER ON/OFF
TX F MON
Variable Attenuator 0 ~ 80 dB
IF POWER METER
MSTU Front View
Figure 4.15 - Set-up of AGC Range Measurement
MAIN-1 RX
MAIN-1 TX
PROT TX
OFF
4-26
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
MAIN-1 SD RX
MN IF OUT
PROT SD RX
UMN
4.5.7
Optical Output Power Level

This test describes the Optional Characteristics tests for the SRT 1F radio equipment.
4.5.7.1
Equipment Required Optical Power Meter
4.5.7.2
Specification
S-1.1 8~15dBm L-1.1 0~5dBm L-1.2 0~5dBm
4.5.7.3
Test Procedure To measure the Optical Output Power of OPT INTF unit. Provisioning IS (for all units) ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) OFF 1. Clean and inspect the optical connections. 2. Connect the optical power meter to the optical signal output of the OPT INTF unit through the SC optical fiber. 3. Verify that the optical output power complies with the specification. 4. Record the results. 5. Repeat for all OPT INTF units.
Note:
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-27
UMN
BRU
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
[P]
SCSU
CN 11
CN 73 CN 74 CN 76 CN 77
BBIU
CN 75 CN 78
CN 72 CN 79
To/from Unit
[M1 M1] M1
[M2 M2] M2
[M3 M3] M3
[M4 M4] M4
[M5 M5] M5
[M6 M6] M6
[M7 M7] M7
Figure 4.16 - Optical Output Power Measurement
4-28
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
IN
-V IN
-V IN
OUT
MSTU 1
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
BSW 3 BSW 4 HK 1
MSPSW 1
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
BSW 5 HK 2
MSPSW 2 MSPSW 3
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
BSW 7 OCC INTF
MSPSW 4 MSPSW 5
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
-V IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
Optical Power Meter
-V IN
STM-1 Optical Signal

BSW 6 OPT INTF Y
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
ECU 1
MSPSW6
ECU 2
MSPSW 7
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
UMN
4.5.8
Minimum and Maximum Optical Receive Level

This test is to measure the minimum (MIM) and maximum (MAX) optical receive levels of the SRT 1F radio.
4.5.8.1
Test Procedure To measure the receive levels: 1. Maintain the optical attenuator set-up. 2. Slowly increase the optical attenuation until the LINE LED glows. This indicates that the B2 MIN alarm threshold has been crossed. 3. Reduce the attenuation by 1 dB to remove the alarm.
Note:
The B2 alarm will not clear immediately, allow time for the alarm to clear before proceeding.
4. Remove the patchcord from the receiver and connect it into the optical power meter.
5. Use LCT to override the safety interlock. (Status/ControlControl PanelALS Release) 6. Click on the OK command button to fire the laser for 90 seconds. 7. Record the measurement in the Data Recording Forms.
Note:
The following steps are optional. They check that the maximum input level to the OPT INTF unit (according to the specification) does not overload the optical receiver.
8a. For OPT INTFL11, decrease the attenuation until a 10 dBm is read on the power meter. (Approximately 8 dB attenuation.) 8b. For OPT INTFS11, decrease the attenuation until a 8 dBm is read on the power meter. (Approximately 0 dB attenuation.) 8c. For OPT INTFL12, decrease the attenuation until a 10 dBm is read on the power meter. (Approximately 8 dB attenuation.) 9. Disconnect the patchcord from the power meter and reconnect it to the receiver. 10. Verify that the B2 MIN alarm has cleared, and the PRBS is errorfree, indicating that the OPT INTF complies with the specification. 11. Record the results in the Data Recording Forms. 12. Adjust the optical attenuator to 15 dB. 13. Repeat the procedure from Step 2 for the remaining OPT INTF units.
Note:
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-29
UMN
BRU
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
- V IN
[P]
SCSU
CN 11
OUT
OUT
-V IN
IN
CN 73 CN 74 CN 76 CN 77
BBIU
CN 75 CN 78
CN 72 CN 79
To/from Unit
To/from Unit
[M1 M1] M1
[M2 M2] M2
[M3 M3] M3
[M4 M4] M4
[M5 M5] M5
[M6 M6] M6
[M7 M7] M7
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
Figure 4.17 - Optical Receive Levels Test Set Up
4-30
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
IN
MSTU 1
-V IN
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
BSW 3 BSW 4 HK 1
MSPSW 1
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
BSW 5 HK 2
MSPSW 2 MSPSW 3
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
BSW 7 OCC INTF
MSPSW 4 MSPSW 5
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
-V IN
[M7 M7] M7
MSTU 8
Variable Attenuator
Optical Power Meter
-V IN
BSW 6 OPT INTF Y
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
ECU 1
MSPSW6
ECU 2
MSPSW 7
SV
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
OPT INTF X
OPT INTF Y
UMN
4.5.9
External Clock Supply

This test checks the SRT 1F radio external clock supply.
4.5.9.1
Warning Messages Refer to the warning messages detailed in par. 4.3.
4.5.9.2
Test Procedure For equipment configured for external or tributary timing only. To test the external clock: 1. Supply an external 2 MHz clock source compliant to ITU-T Recommendation to EXT CLK IN coaxial connector CN1 or CN2 located on SCSU BWB, feed a frequency counter with the same source. 2. Connect another frequency counter to the T0 CLK OUT MON coaxial connector CN 5 or CN 6 located on SCSU BWB, by using the clock monitor patchcord. 3. Does the second frequency counter read the same value shown by the first one?. If YES, STOP, proceed to Step 5. If NO, continue with Step 4. 4. Resolve the problem through local procedures by ensuring that the selected source of synchronisation is present and valid. 5. If external timing is used, disconnect the clock primary and secondary sources from the SRT 1F. Verify that an alarm appears on the local terminal (LCT).
Note:
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-31
UMN
PDU(OPTION)
CN 10 CN 11 CN 12 CN 1
- V IN
CN 2
- V IN
CN 3
- V IN
CN 4
CN 5
- V IN
CN 6
BRU
- V IN
CN 7
CN 8
- V IN
CN 9
- V IN
- V IN
Frequency Counter
[P]
MSTU 1
BSW 1 BSW 2
[M1 M1] M1
MSTU 2
BSW 3 BSW 4
[M2 M2] M2
MSTU 3
BSW 5 BSW 6
[M3 M3] M3
MSTU 4
BSW 7
[M4 M4] M4
MSTU 5
[M5 M5] M5
MSTU 6
[M6 M6] M6
MSTU 7
-V IN
[M7 M7] M7
-V IN
CN 40 CN 41 CN 42
MSTU 8
Detail
ECU 1
ECU 2
SV
CN 43 CN 44 CN 45 CN 33 CN 34 CN 35
CN 1
CN 3
CN 5
HK 1 HK 2 TCU X TCU Y
OCC INTF
CN 2
CN 4
CN 6
SCSU
CN 12 CN 13 CN 14
CN 15 CN 16 CN 17
CN 31 CN 21 CN 22
CN 32 CN 23 CN 24
CN 11
-V IN
CN 11
-V IN
MSPSW 1
MSPSW 2
MSPSW 3
MSPSW 4
MSPSW 5
MSPSW6
MSPSW 7
CN 65
CN 66
CN 67
CN 68
CN 73 CN 74 CN 76 CN 77
BBIU
CN 75 CN 78
CN 72 CN 79
Figure 4.18 - External Clock Frequency Measurement
BB INTF P BBC
BB INTF X
[M1 M1] M1
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M2 M2] M2
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M3 M3] M3
BB INTF Y
4-32
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
BB INTF X
[M4 M4] M4
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M5 M5] M5
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M6 M6] M6
BB INTF Y
BB INTF X
[M7 M7] M7
BB INTF Y
UMN
4.5.10
Rack Alarm Test

This test checks the rack alarms.
4.5.10.1
Equipment Required Multi Meter
4.5.10.2
Test procedure Generate warning, minor, major and critical alarms. Confirm contact closure with the multi-meter (relevant pin connected to ground). Apply closure to the alarm ACO input and confirm the ACO activation.
Note:
Radio Equipment
Rack Alarm BUS Output
L L L +Vcc L L L L L L L +Vcc L
NE ALM-N NE ALM-C VIS CR AUD CR VIS MJ AUD MJ VIS MN AUD MN VIS WN AUD WN RAB -MNT COMMON
ACO IN
Photo Coupler Primary
CN 31 on SCSU BWB
Figure 4.19 - Rack Alarm Bus Test Set-Up
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-33
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP Table 4.4 - Rack Alarm Bus Pinouts Interface Logic Name NE ALM-N NE ALM-C VIS CR AUD CR VIS MJ AUD MJ VIS MN AUD MN VIS WN AUD WN RAB-MNT ACO IN *ACO IN Description NE Alarm (N) NE Alarm (C) Visible Critical alarm Audible Critical alarm Visible Major alarm Audible Major alarm Visible Minor alarm Audible Minor alarm Visible Warning Audible Warning Maintenance Alarm Cut Off In ACO Ground Alarm CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE Cut off = CLOSE Power down OPEN CLOSE OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN
UMN
NE ALM = (CR) OR (MJ) OR (MN) OR (WR) Interface Specification INPUT OUTPUT I = 0.3mA to 11.3mA I max = 100mA V max = 110V (DC)
Table 4.5 Rack Alarm Bus Pinouts

PIN No.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Description
Remarks
8
PIN No.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Description
COMMON VIS MN AUD MN VIS MJ AUD MJ VIS CR AUD CR FG
Remarks
*ACO IN ACO IN NE ALM-N NE ALM-C RAB-MNT VIS WR AUD WR
ACO Ground line Alarm Cut Off IN NE alarm (N) NE alarm Maintenance Visible Warning Audible Warning
Visible Miner alarm Audible Miner alarm Visible Major alarm Audible Major alarm Visible Critical alarm Audible Critical alarm Frame Ground
4-34
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.6
SRT 1F Inter-Station Tests

This chapter details the procedures to be carried out after In-Station tests have been completed and the SRT 1F has been connected to the network.
ATTENTION
DO NOT attempt to re-tune any adjustment point, if the test result complies with the specification.
4.6.1
Receive (RX) Signal Level

This test is meant to confirm the result of antenna alignment by measuring the RF receiving level at the input of MSTU.
4.6.1.1
Equipment Required LCT RF Power Meter
4.6.1.2
Test Procedure 1. Confirm the TX site state (High or Normal power). 2. Remove MN and SD RF connection between the branching network and RX. 3. Connect the Power meter to the RX branching network main output. 4. Compare the result with the path calculations. Results should be within 1.5 dB approximately. 5. Compare the result with the value shown by LCT (Menu DISPLAY CURRENT LEVEL) 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for SD. 7. Repeat for other bearer/s (PROT, M1 etc.)
Note:
Report any problems to the installation group. Please note that LCT accuracy is 3 dB with the received field in the range between 35 and 65 dB.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-35
UMN
4.6.2
IF FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Instruments: Link Analyser, adapters, IF & RF cables, fixed & variable attenuators. Proceeding: Connect the Tx Link Analyser to 70M IN of MSTU in the remote station and the Rx Link Analyser to XPIC OUT of MSTU in the nearend station as show in Figure 4.20, set as follow Link TX Settings Baseband Frequency Deviation Sweep width IF Frequency IF Level 250KHz 250KHz 12.0 MHz 70.00 MHz 10.0 dBm
Change the status of Rx equipment from In service to Maintenance by LCT. Choose Status/Control Change Maintenance State and select the MSTU. The Change Maintenance State dialog box appears. Select RSPI and the action Maintenance and click OK.
If Space Diversity system is applied, this test should be done for MAIN receiver and SD receiver independently. MAIN RX 1. Remove the SD RX RF cable. 2. 3. In the received side set the ITEM No. rotary switch to B position. Set the Frequency Measurement of Rx side by FLEXR. Choose State/Control Maintenance Radio Interface Radio Physical Interface. Select the MSTU unit and the dialog box appears. Select the Action Operate and the Item Frequency Measurement and click OK. The amplitude response and the group delay curve are displayed on RX link analyser. If the RX link analyser is not locked, confirm that the XPIC OUT level is whitin the limit (10dBm1dB). If the output level is not comply with the tolerance adjust the level by LCT. In absence of fading and reflections, check that the amplitude response and the group delay of the main receiver are within the limits. If the amplitude response does not comply with the limits, use the INCR/DECR push-button on the front panel of the MSTU until the amplitude is whitin the limits. Performed this operation with ITEM No. rotary switch in the B position. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4. 5. 6.
7.
8.
4-36
UMN 9.
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP If the group delay response does not comply with the limits, use the INC/DECR push-button on the front panel of the MSTU until the amplitude is whitin the limits. Performed this operation with ITEM No. rotary switch in the following position: ITEM No.2 : DELAY-HIGH (for adjustment of higher frequency) ITEM No.3 : DELAY-MIDDLE (for adjustment of middle frequency) ITEM No.4 : DELAY-LOW (for adjustment of low frequency)
10. To memorizing the new value set the ITEM No. rotary switch in 9 position and push the INCR/DECR buttons simultaneosly. After that, reset the ITEM No. rotary switch to 0. 11. Connect the SD RX RF cable. 12. Enter in the Radio Physical Interface dialog box by LCT and Release the Frequency Measurement. 13. Change the status of Rx equipment from service by LCT. SD RX 14. Remove the MN RX RF cable. 15. In the received side set the ITEM No. rotary switch to B position. 16. Set the Frequency Measurement of Rx side by LCT. Choose State/Control Maintenance Radio Interface Radio Physical Interface. Select the MSTU unit and the dialog box appears. 17. Select the Action Operate and the Item Frequency Measurement and click OK. 18. The amplitude response and the group delay curve are displeyed on RX link analyser. 19. If the RX link analyser is not locked, confirm that the XPIC OUT level is whitin the limit (10dBm1dB). If the output level is not comply with the tolerance adjust the level by LCT. 20. In absence of fading and reflections, check that the amplitude response and the group delay of the diversity receiver are within the limits. 21. If the amplitude response does not comply with the limits, adjust it by LCT. Choose Status/Control Maintenance Radio Interface RSPI adjustment. Click a selectable unit, then click anywhere else on the shelf. The RSPI Adjustment dialog box appears Select the Adjustment Item SDSLOPE to modify the IF response. Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required and click OK. Maintenance to In
22. If the group delay response does not comply with the limits, use the INC/DECR push-button on the front panel of the MSTU until the
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-37
UMN
amplitude is whitin the limits. Performed this operation with ITEM No. rotary switch in the following position: ITEM No.2 : DELAY-HIGH (for adjustment of higher frequency) ITEM No.3 : DELAY-MIDDLE (for adjustment of middle frequency) ITEM No.4 : DELAY-LOW (for adjustment of low frequency)
23. To memorizing the new value set the ITEM No. rotary switch in 9 position and push the INCR/DECR buttons simultaneosly. After that, reset the ITEM No. rotary switch to 0. 24. Connect the MN RX RF cable. 25. Enter in the Radio Physical Interface dialog box by LCT and Release the Frequency Measurement. 26. Change the status of Rx equipment from Maintenance to In service by LCT. NOTE: In the 128 QAM system, the IF adaptive equaliser D-EQL is used according to the BRU system. Please refers to the following table: CH arrangement Interleaved Co-Channel Co-Channel Co-Channel Adjacent Channel None One adjacent Upper Two adjacent One adjacent Lower D-EQL code CT DLEQ-1161-SOSHIN CT DLEQ-1235-SOSHIN CT DLEQ-1234-SOSHIN CT DLEQ-1236-SOSHIN
4-38
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
RX SIDE
TX SIDE
IF IN
MAIN IF MON
ON OFF POWER ON/OFF ON
Microwave Link Analyzer (Transmitter)
SD IF MON
OFF POWER ON/OFF
DADE setting for SD IF Adp. Equal. D-EQL
TX F MON
XPIC OUT
INCR DECR
Microwave Link Analyzer (Receiver)
TX F MON
ITEM No. ROTARY SW
Figure 4.20 Test bench for IF FREQUENCY RESPONSE
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-39
UMN
4.6.3
SPACE DIVERSITY EQUALIZATION

Instruments: Link Analyser, Spectrum Analyser, adapters, IF & RF cables, fixed & variable attenuators. Proceeding: 1. Connect the Tx Link Analyser to 70M IN of MSTU in the remote station and the Rx Link Analyser to XPIC OUT of MSTU in the nearend station, set as follow: Link TX Settings Baseband Frequency Deviation Sweep width IF Frequency IF Level 250KHz 250KHz 2.0 MHz 70.00 MHz 10.0 dBm
2. Select ATPC transmitters function as ATPC function OFF and transmitting to maximum level (ATPC HIGH). 3. Change the status of Rx equipment from In service to Maintenance by LCT. Choose Status/Control Change Maintenance State and select the MSTU. The Change Maintenance State dialog box appears (Figure 4.21). Select RSPI and the action Maintenance and click OK.
Figure 4.21 Change Maintenance State dialog box
4-40
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4. Set the Frequency Measurement in the Rx equipment by LCT. Choose State/Control Maintenance Radio Interface Radio Physical Interface. Select the MSTU unit and the dialog box appears (Figure 4.22). Select the Action Operate and the Item Frequency Measurement and click OK.
Figure 4.22 - Radio Physical Interface dialog box 5. Set the ITEM No. rotary switch in position B in the Rx station. 6. Confirm that the following output level is whitin the limit: XPIC OUT 10dBm1db 7. If the output level is not comply with the tolerance adjust the level by LCT. Choose Status/Control Maintenance Radio Interface RSPI adjustment. Select the Adjustment Item RX IF GAIN to modify the XPIC OUT. Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required and click OK. Choose State/Control Maintenance Radio Interface Maintenance for SD. Select the MSTU unit and the Maintenance for SD dialog box appears (Figure 4.23). Select the Action Operate and the Item SD DADE ON and click OK. Select the Action Operate and the Item EPS OFF and click OK
8. Set the SD DADE ON and EPS OFF by LCT in Rx station.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-41
UMN
Figure 4.23 - Maintenance for SD dialog box 9. To display the two tracks on the Rx link analyser turn the ITEM No. rotary switch in position 0 and after than in position B again. The difference between the 2 tracks of group delay visualised represents delay T between Main and diversitys received signals (due to waveguide path difference). 10. Confirm that the delay difference displayed on the Microwave Link Analyzer is less than 2 ns. If the delay difference is not less than 2 ns, change the delay line for IF DADE so as to achieve the difference of 2 ns. The green jumpers are used to introduce the delay on Diversity way. The green jumpers in default position (vertical) does not introduced delay, put it in horizontal position to introduce the delay. Please refer to following picture (Figure 4.24):
Figure 4.24 SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-42
UMN
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 11. Enter in the Maintenance for SD dialog box by LCT and select the Action Release and the Item SD DADE ON and click OK. In the same dialog box select the Action Release and the Item EPS OFF and click OK Finally to complete equalisation, a compensation of the signal amplitude entering the combiner has to be done as reported. 1. Remove the SD RX RF input cable. 2. Confirm that the following output levels are within the limits: MN 70M OUT XPIC OUT 10dBm1dB 10dBm1dB
3. If the output levels are not comply with the tolerances adjust the levels by LCT. Choose Status/Control Maintenance Radio Interface RSPI adjustment. Select the MSTU unit and the RSPI Adjustment dialog box appears (Figure 4.25).
Figure 4.25 Radio Physical Interface dialog box Select the Adjustment Item RX RF GAIN to modify the MN 70M OUT. Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required and click OK. Select the Adjustment Item RX IF GAIN to modify the XPIC OUT. Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required and click OK.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-43
UMN
4. Replace the SD RX RF input cable and remove the MAIN RX RF input cable. 5. Confirm that the following output levels are within the limits: SD 70M OUT XPIC OUT 10dBm1dB 10dBm1dB
6. If the output levels are not comply with the tolerances adjust the levels by LCT. Choose Status/Control Maintenance Radio Interface RSPI adjustment. Click a selectable unit, then click anywhere else on the shelf. The RSPI Adjustment dialog box appears. Select the Adjustment Item RX RF GAIN to modify the SD 70M OUT. Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required. Select the Adjustment Item SD GAIN to modify the XPIC OUT. Select the UP/DOWN and the Mode as required
7. Set the ITEM No. rotary switch in position 0in the Rx station. 8. Enter in the Radio Physical Interface dialog box by LCT and Release the Frequency Measurement. 9. Change the status of Rx equipment from Maintenance to In service by LCT. 10. Replace the MAIN RX RF input cable. Repeate the same procedure for all MSTU units equipped. Note: In the SRT1F equipment it is possible to compensate a static delay between Main and Diversity antenna only to inserted a delay on diversity way. The max delay compensable is 120nsec.
4-44
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.6.4
ATPC Test (End to End LAB Test)

This test is meant to measure the ATPC. (End to End Lab Test)
4.6.4.1
Equipment Required Variable RF attenuator LCT
4.6.4.2
Test Procedure 1. Remove RF IN, MAIN and SD cables. 2. Insert the variable attenuator between the MAIN RF OUT of the branching network and MAIN RF input of the RX. 3. Adjust for minimum attenuation. 4. Check on LCT for the TX power level at the remote site by: Status/control Shelf condition Select TX, M1 / PROT 5. Increase the attenuation for RSL ATPC activation point from the NORMAL POWER to the HIGH POWER (40, 50 or 60 dBm selectable) 6. Repeat step 4 and check for HIGH POWER 7. Remove the attenuator and wait for ATPC restore time from the HIGH POWER to the NORMAL POWER (1, 4, or 15 mins). The NORMAL POWER is dynamic varying the level due to the propagation loss. 8. Repeat step 4 and check for no alarm (normal) 9. Restore connections.
Note:
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-45
UMN
MAIN ANTENNA
Remote Station Transmitter
SD ANTENNA
MAIN (V)
Transducer
SD (V)
B
Circulator
R
Dummy Load
CH 1
CH 3
RX BPF
TX BPF
PROT RX
CH 3 MAIN-1 SD RX PROT SD RX
ON
POWER ON/OFF
TX F MON
Variable Attenuator 0 ~ 80 dB
Figure 4.26 - ATPC Test Set-Up
4-46
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
MAIN-1 RX
MAIN-1 TX
PROT TX
OFF
CH 3
RX BPF
CH 1
CH 1
UMN
4.7
SRT 1F End to End Station Performance Tests

This chapter provides instructions for end to end station testing of the SRT 1F radio.
4.7.1
4.7.1.1
Remote NE Management via DCC

DCC configuration Note : The following settings have to be applied to both Local and Remote NE Connect to the NE using LCT. To enable DCC choose Provisioning Facility Set Base Band Interface Set OHB, the dialog box reported in Figure 4.27 appears.
Figure 4.27
Select Action Edit, STM1RS, J0 Byte = N, E1 Byte = Y, D1-D3 Byte = Y, B1 Byte = Y then click OK. Select Provisioning Section DCC SDCC SS, the dialog box in Figure 4.28 appears.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-47
UMN
Figure 4.28 Select Action Edit, Access ID = GP1-W1-R-RS, Service State = In Service then click OK, when prompted to select Action Initialize click Cancel. Repeat the last command choosing GP1-W1-L-RS as Access ID In the same dialog box choose Action Initialize then click OK Now LAPD parameters have to be set choose Provisioning Section DCC LAPD Parameters. The dialog box in Figure 4.29 is shown.
Figure 4.29
4-48
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP Select Access ID = GP1-W1-R-RS, leave as default all the other parameters, or for the LAPD Cmd/Rsp only choose the correct setting according to Table 1 then click OK, when prompted to select Action Initialize click Cancel. Repeat the last command choosing GP1-W1-L-RS as Access ID In the same dialog box choose Action Initialize then click OK Table 4.6 - Presettings Local NE PLUS-R (*) PLUS-C USER (**) * Default Setting ** Use USER/NETWORK only for interworking with other vendor Note: The Initialize command can take up to 2-3 minutes, please wait until command completion. Remote NE PLUS-R (*) PLUS-C NETWORK (**)
4.7.1.2
Test Perform all the tests reported in the list below and mark the appropriate box in the Test Report .
1. Login to the Local NE 2. Login to the Remote NE
Note: In order to Login to the Remote NE, its NE ID must be added in the access list, after the login command and after the serial port parameters acceptance, the dialog box reported in Figure 4.30 is shown.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-49
UMN
Figure 4.30 Type the NE Id in the Enter NE ID field then click Add NE ID, enter username and password then click OK.
4-50
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.7.2
Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test

To check the operation of the Radio Protection Switch function.
4.7.2.1
Equipment Required LCT MP1550A SDH Analyzer or equivalent Patch cords, attenuators and cables.
4.7.2.2
Test Procedure 1. Remove MAIN and SD RX, RF input cable. 2. Insert variable attenuator between MAIN RX, RF INPUT and RF OUTPUT of RX BPF of BRU. 3. Configure test equipment as per Figure 4.31 4. Confirm error (5 minute test). free transmission prior to start testing
5. Increase the attenuation of the ATT slowly and confirm, via LCT that a radio protection switch by USW has occurred. Note: Confirm that the switch occurs at the threshold set by LCT 6. Confirm that the SDH analyzer is error free. 7. Decrease the attenuation of the ATT slowly and confirm, via LCT that a radio protection switch has restored. 8. Confirm that the SDH analyzer is error free. 9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 for the other MAIN channels (if fitted). 10. Via LCT, perform a manual switch of USW for MAIN 1. 11. Confirm that the SDH analyzer is error free. 12. Release the manual switch. 13. Confirm switch reversion and error free. 14. Repeat steps 10 to 14 for all main bearers (if fitted) Note: Report any problems to the installation group.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-51
UMN
STM-1(CMI) OUT STM-1(CMI) IN

ECU 1 ECU 2 SV
SCSU
BSW unit
BSW 1 TCU X
BSW 2 TCU Y
BSW 3
BSW 4 HK 1
BSW 5 HK 2
Figure 4.31 - Radio Protection Switch (RPS) Test Set-Up (in case of STM-1 CMI electric signal)
BSW 6
BSW 7 OCC INTF
SDH Analyzer
WS
4-52
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.7.3
Way Side Test

This section covers the test procedures for the Way Side function. These tests are: Way Side Transmission Test Way Side Characteristics Test
4.7.3.1
Equipment Required RF variable attenuator Error ratio test set for 2 Mbit/s MP1550A SDH Analyzer or equivalent
4.7.3.2
Way Side Transmission Test IS (In Service) for all units WS Enable (WS1, WS2) for PROT and M1 NE Clock M1 Line sync 1. Input the 2.048 Mbit/s signal to the 75 port of the BSW unit, and confirm that there is no error at the receiving side. This test shall be carried out on both CH of WS1 and WS2. 2. In the same way, confirm 120 input/output port is error free.
Provisioning
Note:
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-53
UMN
SDH Analyzer
ECU 1 ECU 2 SV
BSW 1 TCU X BSW 2 TCU Y BSW 3 BSW 4 HK 1 BSW 5 HK 2 BSW 6 BSW 7 OCC INTF
WS(SOH) IN WS(SOH) OUT WS(RFCOH) IN
WS:2.048 Mb/s OUT WS:2.048 Mb/s IN
PCM Analyzer
SCSU
WS(RFCOH) OUT
BSW unit
Figure 4.32 - Way Side Transmission Test Set-Up (In case that line impedance is 75 .) SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-54
UMN
4.7.4
BER Characteristics Test (Lab Test)

This BER Characteristic is a lab test.
4.7.4.1
Equipment Required MP1550A SDH analyzer or equivalent. Variable RF attenuator
4.7.4.2
Specification Up fade Down fade Test Procedure

Provisioning IS (In Service) for all units
BER=10-3 or better (at RSL = 17dBm) See Figure 4.34
1. Calibrate the RF variable attenuator vs. receiving level. 2. Measure the BER payload (VC4), and confirm that the BER characteristics meet the required specification.
Note:
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-55
UMN
Variable Attenuator
STM-1 ANALYZER
STM-1 ANALYZER
STM-1(CMI) IN STM-1(CMI) OUT
SDH Analyzer
SDH Analyzer
PROT
M-1
M-2
PROT
M-1
M-2
BSW unit
BSW unit
SCSU
SCSU
Figure 4.33 - BER Test Set-Up
4-56
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP Figure 4.34 shows the Down Fade BER Characteristics
BER = 10 - 3 at RSL = - 74.5 dBm

10
-3
10 -
BER
10 5
Guaranteed Curve
10 -
BER = 10 - 6 at RSL = - 70.5 dBm Typical Curve

- 78 - 76 - 74 - 72 - 70 - 68 dBm
Receive Signal Level (a) Down Fade BER Characteristics of 64 QAM system
BER = 10
10 3
-3
at RSL = - 72 dBm
10 -
BER
10 -
Guaranteed Curve BER = 10 - 6 at RSL = - 68 dBm

6
10 -
Typical Curve
- 76 - 74 - 72 - 70 - 68 - 66 dBm
Receive Signal Level (b) Down Fade BER Characteristics of 128 QAM system
Figure 4.34 - Down Fade BER Characteristics
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-57
UMN
4.7.5
BACKGROUND BER TEST

Instruments: SDH Data Transmission Analyser with S1 byte facility, BB cables Procedure: Connect the DTA to the SRT-1F in a station, inserting a BaseBand signal loop in remote station, select a STM-1 signal (with VC-4 unframed 140 M/s payload) select correct synch source and let the system recording for 12 hours (or different depending on Customer requirements). In case of problem during recording test, identify the affected direction using another DTA and through other tests identify responsible unit, replace it and repeat the test. Caution: The radio equipment should be synchronizes before to perform this test. To synchronize the hop perform the following step: In the local station connect the DTA to the radio and set the byte S1 to 0010 (G.811) In the local station by LCT choose Provisioning Set Synchronization Set Sync Mode and the following dialog box appears (Figure 4.35). Select the Action Edit and the SYNC Mode 1 and click OK
Figure 4.35 Set Sync Mode dialog box Choose Provisioning Set Synchronization Set Sync Parameter and the following dialog box appears (Figure 4.36). Select the Action Edit and set the CLK MODE = TCU and EC Priority 1 = GP1-W1-L (STM1 channel1) and click OK. In the same dialog box select the action Retrieve and click OK to control if the Radio is sync. with STM1.
4-58
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Figure 4.36 Set Sync Parameter dialog box In the remote station by LCT choose Provisioning Set Synchronization Set Sync Mode Figure 4.35 appear. Select the Action Edit and the SYNC Mode 1 and click OK. Choose Provisioning Set Synchronization Set Sync Parameter and the Figure 4.36 appears. Select the Action Edit and set the CLK MODE = TCU and EC Priority 1 = GP1-W1-R (DEM channel 1) and click OK. In the same dialog box select the action Retrieve and click OK to control if the Radio is sync. with DEM 1.
Caution: The above parameter is used only to perform the Background BER test. Every in service equipment should be configured according to the sync. planning.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-59
UMN
4.7.6
4.7.6.1
Synchronization
Clock Sources selection Connect to the NE using LCT. Choose Provisioning System Set Synchronization Set Sync Mode, the following dialog box appears (Figure 4.37). Select the Action Edit and the SYNC Mode 1 then click OK
Figure 4.37 Choose Provisioning System Set Synchronization Set Sync Parameter and the following dialog box appears (Figure 4.38).
4-60
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Figure 4.38 Select the Action Edit and set the CLK MODE = TCU , EC Priority 1 = GP1-W1-L (STM1 channel1), EC Priority 2 = CLKHZ-X (External input), EC Priority 3 = GP1-W1-R (Radio Bearer 1) Set the External Source quality to 2 (G.811) in the Ext 2MHz-X field Set the EC Threshold field to 5 (Internal Clock quality) then click OK. Connect the SDH Signal Analyzer to the radio (BSW Port) and set the byte S1 to 0010 (G.811) Connect the 2 MHz clock Source to the external clock input Verify all the setting choosing the Action Retrieve in the same window.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-61
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.7.6.2 Test
UMN
Perform all the tests reported in the list below and mark the appropriate box in the Test Report.
Note: In order to verify the correct execution of the test reported below, always check the result using the Retrieve action in the dialog box reported in Figure 4.39. 1. Verify that NE is locked to EC1 2. Disconnect EC1, verify that NE is locked to EC2 3. Re-connect EC1, verify that NE is locked to EC1 4. Disconnect EC1 and EC2, verify that NE is locked to EC3 5. Re-connect EC2, verify that NE is locked to EC2 6. Disconnect EC2 and EC3, verify that NE enter HOLDOVER mode 7. Re-connect ECx, verify that NE is locked to ECx (where x=1,2,3) 8. Switch to FREERUNNING mode Note: In order to switch to FREERUNNING mode choose Status/Control Protection Switch Operate Sync Switch, in the dialog box shown (Figure 4.40) select Action Operate, Timing Control Type EC and Switch to INT then click OK.
Figure 4.39
4-62
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.7.7
MSP Switching Test

This test is to confirm the MSP switching operation. This test is applicable for terminal equipment of OPT INTF with line protection.
4.7.7.1
Test Procedure
Service State In service (for all units) Provisioning: 1. On the set up shown in Figure 4.40, set the optical variable Attenuator to the normal condition. 2. On the SRT 1F A equipment, select the X-side of the OPT INTF. 3. Interrupt the optical input signal by increasing the value of the Variable attenuator, and confirm that the change over from X-side to Y-side is automatically operated by the MSP function. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for Y-side to X-side change over. 5. On the SRT 1F B equipment, select the X-side of the OPT INTF. 6. Remove the X-side OPT INTF unit, and confirm that the STM-1 signal has automatically changed over from the X-side to the Y-side by the MSP function. 7. Repeat steps 6 to 7 for Y-side to X-side changeover. Note: Report any problems to the installation group.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-63
UMN
Test Set Up
SRT 1F A
SRT 1F B
OPT INTF(X)
OPT INTF(Y)
OPT INTF(X) System Y System X
Variable Attenuator PATTERN GENERATOR

System X
PATTERN GENERATOR
System Y
Figure 4.40 - MSP Switching Function Test
4-64
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
OPT INTF(Y)
UMN
4.8
4.8.1
Appendix
MSTU Setting
MSTUs (Main Signal Transmit Units) are set and tuned at the factory and commissioning test are executed to assure the system performance. There is no need to change settings or to re-adjust the MSTU controls. Siemens strongly recommends not to attempt to change or re-adjust settings unless the error performance has degraded seriously due to equipment deterioration. The following information is provided for a very skilled technical staff who might have to change or re-adjust settings in some special circumstances. Warning ;
Do not attempt to change or re-adjust settings of MSTU unless strictly necessary. If necessary, use the LCT as the first priority. In case of single antenna reception remove all straps of DADE (8) J1 to J32. (without SD),
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-65
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.1.1 MSTU Front Panel
UMN
FAN (1)
FAN PWR (2)

ON
70M IN REF I/O
(5) (6)
POWER ON/OFF (3)
MN 70M OUT (7) SD
OFF
DADE
(8)
D-EQL (9) TX F MON (4) XPIC OUT (10) XPIC IN INCR DECR ITEM No. (11) Factory use only. ITEM No. must be 0 for normal operation. (12)
UNIT/RCI (13) LINE
Figure 4.41 - Front Panel of MSTU unit
4-66
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP Figure 4.41 shows the front panel of the MSTU unit. Table 4.7 shows the functions of the MSTU front panel Table 4.7 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel
No. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Item FAN FAN PWR POWER ON/OFF TX LO MON 70M IN REF I/O 70M OUT MN 70M OUT SD DADE
Function Cooling 4 fans for transmitter. Power cable connector for cooling fans DC power supply switch for MSTU unit Monitor terminal for TX local frequency 70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the LCT. 70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of Main/SD antenna reception DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference
See Figure 4.42 and Table 4.9 for setting. Remove all straps in case of single antenna reception (without SD).
(9) (10) (11) (12)
D-EQL XPIC OUT (master) XPIC IN (slave) INCR DECR ITEM No.
Delay equalizer for branching network XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation Analog level setting of MSTU (Factory use only) Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use a LCT terminal for maintenance
See the next page for details. To memorize the setting, select ITEM No. = 9, then press INCR/DECR switches together.
(13)
LED indicator UNIT/RCI LINE
Alarm/status indicator : Normal = green(*), Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking Normal = green(*), Line failure = red on * : Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable via the LCT.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-67
UMN
Table 4.8 shows the relationship between the position of rotary switch and functions of Analog Level Setting (12). Table 4.8 - Function of Rotary Switch (12)
No. 0 1 Item Normal operation DADE for XPIC Function The position for normal operation, in service state. INCR and DECR push switches are invalid. Compensates DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer) between Vertical and Horizontal polarization in case of cochannel operation. Adjusts IF-IF group delay, high frequency component. Adjusts IF-IF group delay, medium frequency component Adjusts IF-IF group delay, low frequency component

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
DELAY-H DELAY-M DELAY-L ALC LVL ALC GAIN SD GAIN SD SLOPE RRF GAIN RIF GAIN R SLOPE T SLOPE
Sets TX output level at ALC AUTO (ON) Sets TX output level at ALC MNL (OFF) Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF to compensate the loss of DADE line. Adjusts XPIC OUT slope at AGC OFF to compensate the slope of DADE line. Adjusts MN/SD 70M OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF Compensates the slope of Main line. Compensates the slope of TX. The position for normal operation, in service state. For FAN replacement, inhibits FAN alarm and switches TX output to LOW level. Use the LCT for setting. Do not attempt to re-adjust.
Normal operation FAN replacement

Note
To memorize the setting, select ITEM No. = 9, then press INCR/DECR switches together.
4-68
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 4.8.1.2 DADE setting for SD
The difference of waveguide length between Main and SD antenna shall be compensated by DADE (8).
no use J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32
-
2 ns 4 ns 4 ns 10 ns 10 ns 20 ns 30 ns 40 ns
Figure 4.42 - Strap pin for SD DADE Adjustment
See Table 4.9 for example of SD DADE setting.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-69
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP Table 4.9 - DADE setting for SD

Strap position vs Delay difference between Main and SD antenna 0 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 2 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 4 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 10 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 18 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32 36 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32
UMN
110 ns J1 J3 J5 J7 J9 J11 J13 J15 J17 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J29 J31 J2 J4 J6 J8 J10 J12 J14 J16 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J30 J32
2 ns 4 ns 4 ns 10 ns 10 ns 20 ns 30 ns 40 ns
0 ns : Keep all straps as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6 to J7 and so on. 2 ns : Strap J1 to J2, J3 to J4, but keep others as default, J5 to J7, J6 to J7 and so on. 4 ns : Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J9 to J11, J10 to J12 and so on. 10 ns : Strap J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6 to J7, J9 to J11, J10 to J12 and so on. 14 ns : Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4 and so on.
Attention : In case of single antenna reception (without SD), remove all straps J1 to J32.
4-70
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.8.2
Hardware Setting
Most of system settings on the SRT 1F equipment are set through the LCT terminal. However, some part of system setting shall be carried out with hardware switches. These settings are completed at the factory test according to the system data and standard value. If needing to change these parameters, follow this instruction. Table 4.10 - Hardware Setting Position
Unit
Item
Switch
Setting
Default
SV unit
OSSI type
SWA1
X.25 NE Back to Back
default
TCU
EXT 2M CLK (Y) input
SW81
Balance Unbalance
default
EXT 2M CLK (X) input
SW82
Balance Unbalance
default
EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern T0, T4 CLK output pattern Power supply switch
SW71, 72
Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec) default
SW73, 74
SW75
CN64 (T4) CN65 (T0)
Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec) Balance Unbalance default default
BSW
CMI input
SW2B
WS input for 75 ohms
SW25 (RFCOH) SW28 (SOH)
Balance Unbalance 75 ohms unbalance 120 ohms balance 75 ohms 120 ohms balance Balance Unbalance
default
WS output
default
WS input
default
OCC INTF PE INTF
CMI input
SW29
default
CMI input
SW71
Balance Unbalance
default
Figure 4.43 to Figure 4.47 show the position of switches.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-71
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.2.1 SV unit
UMN
Item
Switch
Setting
Position
OSSI type
SWA1
X.25 NE Back to Back
OPEN CLOSE
SV
X25/BTB
CLOSE OPEN OPEN = X. 25 (default) CLOSE = NE Back to Back Factory setting only
X25/BTB
Figure 4.43 - SWA1 on SV unit front panel
SWA1
4-72
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN 4.8.2.2 TCU unit

Item Switch
Setting
Position
EXT 2M CLK (Y) input
SW81
Balance Unbalance
BAL UNBAL BAL UNBAL BIP RZ BIP RZ BIP RZ BIP RZ

CN96
EXT 2M CLK (X) input
SW82
Balance Unbalance
EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern T0, T4 CLK output pattern Power supply
SW71, 72
Bipolar (Hz) Return to Zero (Bit/sec)
SW73, 74
SW75
CN64 (T4) CN65 (T0)
T0 = jitter FREE
T4 = non jitter FREE
L TOP
CN65 CN64
SW75 SW74 SW73 SW72 SW82 SW81 CN92
TCU unit
SW71
SW71 to 75
SW81, 82
CN64, 65
BIP RZ BIP (default) BAL UNBAL (default)
RZ (default)
Figure 4.44 - TCU Setting SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-73
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.2.3 BSW unit

Item Switch Setting
UMN
Position
CMI input
SW2B
Balance Unbalance
BAL UNBAL BAL UNBAL 75 120 75 120
WS input for 75 ohms WS output
SW25 (RFCOH) SW28 (SOH) SW75 (RFCOH) SW77 (SOH)
Balance Unbalance 75 ohms unbalance 120 ohms balance 75 ohms 120 ohms balance
WS input
SW2B
L TOP
CN96 SW77 SW75 CN92
SW28
SW27
SW25
SW24
BSW unit
SW24, 27 75 (default) 120 SW2B, 25, 28 BAL (default) UNBAL 75 120 (default) SW75, 77
Figure 4.45 - BSW Setting SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-74
UMN 4.8.2.4 OCC INTF unit
Item
Switch
Setting
Position
CMI input
SW29
Balance Unbalance
BAL UNBAL
L TOP
SW29
OCC INTF unit
SW29 UNBAL BAL (default)
Figure 4.46 OCC INTF setting
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
CN92
CN96
4-75
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP 4.8.2.5 PE INTF unit

Item Switch Setting
UMN
Position
CMI input
SW71
Balance Unbalance
BAL UNBAL
CN3H
L TOP
SW71
CN8H CNAH
PE INTF unit
SW71 BAL (default) UNBAL
Figure 4.47 - PE INTF Setting
4-76
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
4.8.3
Provisioning through LCT

Most part of system setting is carried out through the LCT (Local Terminal).
No. 4
LCT Command Provisioning
Unit
Functions
4.1
Service State
Changes Primary service state IS (In Service) and OOS (Out of Service) Enter = Changes from OOS to IS Delete = Changes from IS to OOS Retrieve = Displays current service state BBIU BBIU All All All Service state of BB INTF unit Service state of STM1RS facility Service state of Radio Protection System Service state of RPS Group 1 Service state of RPS Group 2
4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 a b
Change EQPT State Change Facility State Change RPS State Group 1 Group 2
4.2 4.2.1 a
Facility Set Baseband Interface Set OHB All Usage of RSOH and MSOH STM1RS = J0, E1, D1 to D3, B1 (MSTU) STM1MS = MS AIS, MS FERF, E2, D4 to D12 SSBIT, B2, K1K2, Z1,Z2 BBIU Threshold level of error performance STM1RS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS STM1MS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, AU4 = PJS Excessive Error initiator Signal Fail/Signal Degrade Signal Degrade Threshold = 1E-5 to 1E-9 Alarm severity and SA/NSA of following items MSTU EQPT = CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, FAN-FAIL, XPIC-OFF, DEM-FLR, MOD-FLR, ACTCW, RX-FLR, ACTEPSOFF, ACTSDDADE, ACTAGCOFF, FMSR, RXLCINT, TCA-RLTS, TXFLR, ACTALCOFF, TCA-TLTS, PSFAIL RSPI = DEM-LOS, LOF, UAS-RP, SUE-RP, TUE-RP, TCA-RP, TCA-OFS, FADE-ALM, RADRM, RPERR, MOD-LOS, RX-LOS, SD-RCV-DN, TX-LOS WS = LOS CNCT = XPIC-LOS, 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS, PIN-LOS BBIU
Set Facility Threshold
Set Facility Group
BBIU
d 4.2.1d MSTU
Set Alarm Attribute Set Alarm Attribute
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-77

No. 4.2.1d BBIU LCT Command Set Alarm Attribute Unit BBIU Functions EQPT = OPOR, OPD, LBOL, CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MIMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, ACTALS, ALSTST, ALSMAN, PSFAIL
UMN
STM1RS = SUE-B1, TUE-B1, TCA-B1, TCA-OFS, LOS, STIM, UAS-B1 STM1MS = FERF, SUE-B2, TUE-B2, TCA-B2, UASFEBE, SUE-FEBE, TUE-FEBE, TCA-FEBE, SSMBCHG, LOOPBACK, CSESP, FESP, TESP, FSEP, TSEP, AIS AU4 = LOP, AIS, TCA-PJS UC = LOS CNCT = 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS 4.2.1d SCSU Set Alarm Attribute SCSU SV = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, LOG-THC, TLOG-THC, SUBUNIT-FAIL, RCI). RUC (LOS). RSC (LOF). DCC (DCC-FAIL). RPS (PRCM). COM (ACTACO). CNCT (SINT-FAIL) ECU1,2 = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNTCM/NC, RCI). DCC (DCC-FAIL) HK1,2 = EQPT (same as ECU1,2) TCU = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNTCM/NC, WKSWP, RCI, MANSW, FRCDSW, FRZSW, PSFAIL). CLKBIT (LOS-2MB, AIS, FAL). CLKHZ (LOS-2MH). SYNC (SWTOHO, SWTOINT, HOLDOVER, INTERNAL, MANSW, EXTCLKCUTOFF, QUALITY-DOWN, SYNSW PRI1/2/3) 4.2.1e e1 e2 f f1 f2 4.2.2 a b c d e f 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.3 Set Trace Set OHB Set Trace Value Set Signal Label Set OHB Set SLB Value Set Radio Interface Set RSPI Set Radio Channel Set Facility Threshold Set Level Threshold Set Auto Control Set RSC Set Way side traffic Set User Channel Set Radio User Channel System BBIU BBIU BBIU BBIU BBIU BBIU MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU Recovery (and Generation) of BERALM, Route ID, SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N) Frequency CH, Local Clock Master/Slave, MOD/DEM function SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS RL-1, RL-2, TL (dBm) ATPC Mode ATPC Initiator Level (dBm) (LOW/HIGH/AUTO) Inhibit Usage of SOH for signal label Signal label value J0 Byte (N/STMID/TRC) for Trace Expect Trace, Sending Trace, MIS-STI Alarm OFF
Transmit MSTU All MSTU BBIU All
X(Prot)/Y(Main), DSC SEL (P/W1 to 7) SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N) 64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA) RUCVFT(dBr), RUCVFR(dBr), (CODIRE/CONTRA) 64K Interface
4-78
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
No. 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 LCT Command Set NE ID Set Date and Time Set System Configuration Unit All All All

Functions NE ID = TID = System ID Current date and time System Type, RF Type, FRQ Arrangement, Space Diversity, Line Interface, BBIU Use, Group1 Max CH, Group 2 Max CH, Group 1 RPS (Y/N), Group 2 RPS (Y/N) ECU (Y/N), HK unit (Y/N), TCU Protection Sets BB INTF configuration N/OPTL1/OPTL2/OPTL3 Standard time for Performance Monitor start Alarm Severity, Alarm Type, Alarm Message Control Type ALM ACT Time (0/2.5/10), ALM DACT Time (0/16)
4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.3.7 4.3.8 4.3.9 4.3.10 a b
Set Optional Configuration
Unit All
Set Interface Configuration All Set PM Time Set Housekeeping Alarm Set Ext. Control Name Set Alarm Delay Set Synchronization Set Synch Mode Set Synch Parameter All SCSU SCSU All All All All
Synch Mode = CLK MODE (TCU/THROUGH), EC Priority (1/2), LC Priority (1/2/3), Ext 2Mhz, Ext 2Mb/s, EC output 2Mbit EC Threshold, LC Threshold, Error Free (Y/N)
4.3.11 a b 4.3.12
Set Radio Protection Sys Set System Parameter Set SW Initiator Set MSP All All BBIU Maximum CH, Priority CH, Wait to Restore, OCC Use SW Initiator (Y/N) Lock in Function, Switching Count, Monitor Time, Hold Time, Direction, Persist Check Time, Uni/Bi Code Mask, MSP Mode Setting ALS Function (Y/N), Release Time Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No. NE-Type, Resource Status, Eqpt-Note Loopback RLS Time (hour)
4.3.13 4.3.14 4.3.15 4.3.16 a b c d 4.3.17 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3
Set ALS Set Equipment Inventory Set LBK Release Time Set Orderwire Set OHB Channel Select OW Function OW Extension Set LED Mode Section DCC SDCC Service State LAPD Parameter Set 2 DCC
nd
BBIU All
BBIU All All All All
E1 (Y/N), E2 (Y/N) E1/2 (N/GP-W1/ GP-W2/....) OW Function (Y/N), Group Address, Station Address, LED, Buzzer, Relay, Ringer OW Extension E1/2, OW VF TX/RX (-dBr) Mode 1 (Normal = yellow) / Mode 2 (Normal = green)
All All All
In service/Out of Service Window Size, Frame Timeout, Inact Timeout, Retries, Frame Size, LAPD Cmd/Rsp, LAPD Data Link 2 DCC CH selection
nd
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-79

No. 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 LCT Command OSS Interface OSSI type & Service State All LAPB Parameter X25 Parameter All All X25/OSI/Back to Back, IS/OOS Type, Window Retransmit Size, Retry Timer, Packet Unit Functions
UMN
Size,
X25 Address, Packet Size, Window Size, Confirmation, Restart Timer, Request Timeout, Reset Timeout, Clear Timeout, Closed User ID, Channel-Lower, ChannelUpper PVC = Group No. CH NO. Peer Address SVC = Peer Address, Packet Size, Window Size, Confirmation, Ntwk User ID
4.5.4
VC Parameter
All
4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7
Network Layer Protocol NLP Parameter NLP Manual Adjacency NLP Address Prefix All All All NLP Type (IS1/IS1 IS2/ES), Area Address, System ID NLP Type (SVC/PVC), Area Address, System ID NLP Type (SVC), Area Prefix Manual Area Address Scope (LCL/NTWK) Max Area Reachable Area Address
NLP Manual Area Address All Display NLP Manual Area All Address NLP Intermediate Sys1 NLP Intermediate Sys2 All All
4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5
TARP Control TARP Parameters TARP Manual Adjacency Display TARP Adjacency All All
TID Address Resolution Protocol Control TARP Type, Response Time Adjacency NTWK Address, Destination NTWK Address, NPL Type Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address, TID List Destination TID, System ID, NTWK Address, Request Working Address, Retries, Response Timer, TID List
Manual All All All
Display TARP Cache Operate TARP Echo
4.8
LAN Parameters
All
TARP Packet, Packet Size, LAN SAP, Service State
4-80
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
No. 6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
LCT Command Administration Add User Delete User Change User Change Password Logged
Unit
Functions
All All All User All All All
Adds and defines a new LCT user for the NE Deletes a LCT user from the NE Changes privilege of a user Changes the password of user now logged on to the NE Shows the user list registered for the NE Shows privilege of the user now logged on to the NE
Show User List Show Logged User Privilege
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
4-81
UMN
5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

General Maintenance Philosophy During normal operation, the Siemens SRT 1F microwave radio system requires no intrusive maintenance work by maintenance personnel. The main duties of maintenance & operation are: Keep tidy and clean the equipment and the environment. Observe alarm/status information and record properly. In case of system failure, locate the fault and rectify it. If any unit has failed, replace with a spare unit and recover the system.
Human Machine Interface For maintenance & operation interface, the SRT 1F provides: LED indications on each unit. Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) to extend alarm/status information outside the SRT 1F equipment.
5.1
LED Indications
The SV (Supervisory) unit of SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit) indicates the summary of alarms/status conditions. The LEDs on SV unit are visible through the SCSU front cover. Each unit has LEDs for local indication of the alarm/status summary. The LEDs on each unit will be observed by removing the front cover. Details of alarm/status shall be observed through the LCT (Local terminal) or Centralized SV. Alarm indications, to be displayed or not displayed, are set by Alarm Severity of Set Alarm Attribute, Facility, Provisioning through the LCT. Figure 5.1 and Table 5.1 show LED indications of the SV unit. Figure 5.2 and Table 5.2 shows LED indications of other unit.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-1
UMN
SV
UNIT/RCI LINE MISC ACS/SWDL BACK UP NORM CR/MJ/RCI LCT MN/WR MAINT CARD OUT ACO LAN 2W E1
X25/BTB
CALL E1 CALL E2 ACO SW
2W E2 LED TEST
LED Indicator Push SW Modular Jack D-sub 9 (f) Dip switch
Figure 5.1 - Front View of SV unit
5-2
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Table 5.1 - LED Indication of SV unit

LED Indication Group LED Color Status Description
Indication for SV unit
UNIT/RCI
Red
Steady on Blinking
Unit failure of SV unit Log memory threshold crossed RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit Normal operation of SV unit Configuration mismatch of SV unit SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal Housekeeping alarm (DI) on NE is logged on by user Mismatch of software version Software download is on progress Back up of setting data is on progress Normal operation of NE CR/MJ alarm of any unit in NE RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in NE MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE Maintenance condition of NE CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than WR CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious than WR Alarm cut off of NE E1 orderwire is being called E2 orderwire is being called
Green (Y) Yellow (G) LINE Red Green (Y) MISC ACS/SWDL Red Green (Y) Red Yellow (G) BACK UP Indication for NE NORM CR/MJ/RCI Yellow (G) Green (Y) Red
Steady on Blinking Steady on Steady on Steady on Steady on Steady on Blinking Steady on Steady on Steady on Blinking
MN/WR MAINT CARD OUT
Red Yellow (G) Red Yellow (G)
Steady on Steady on Steady on Steady on Steady on Blinking Blinking
ACO Orderwire CALL E1 CALL E2 Note : Green (Y) Yellow (G)
Yellow (G) Green (Y) Green (Y)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-3
UMN
UNIT/RCI LINE
Figure 5.2 - LED Indication of Other Unit
Table 5.2 - LED Indication of Other Unit

Unit LED Color Status Description
All units
UNIT/RCI
Red
Steady on Blinking
Unit failure of the unit RCI (Remote Card Identifier) is operated Normal operation of the unit Configuration mismatch of the unit Loss of Main, Synch or other signal Line signal (working side) is normal SWDL (Software Download) is on progress
Green (Y) Yellow (G) All units except HK SV unit Note : LINE Red Green (Y) SWDL Green (Y) Yellow (G) Yellow (G)
Steady on Blinking Steady on Steady on Steady on
5-4
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5.2
LCT
The LCT (Local terminal) is the main human machine interface for operation & maintenance and system set-up (turn-up). Table 5.3 shows the outline of LCT function. Table 5.3 - Outline of LCT Function
1 2 3 4 File Session TL1 Provisioning Establishes/exits communication to NE Logs on/logs off to NE Creates and sends out TL1 commands Sets the system configuration Sets the usage of SOH Sets alarm severity and threshold level Sets parameters of NE 5 Status/Control Displays alarms/status Displays error performance monitor Displays analog data of radio section Controls radio protection switch Controls other maintenance switches Sets analog level of radio section 6 7 8 Administration Window Help Administrates LCT users Manages window display of LCT Shows help and version information of LCT application
More details are available in this equipment manual. The LCT application software on 3.5 inch diskettes is supplied by Siemens. The customer is requested to install the software onto a Personal Computer. Table 5.4 shows the minimum requirement of hardware to install and operate the LCT software. Table 5.4 - Hardware Requirement
CPU DRAM HD space Diskette drive Recommended Monitor OS Pentium 90 or faster 16 MB or more 200 MB (Minimum available space) 3.5 inch for software setup 800 600 16 bit color mode MS Windows 98 or Windows NT 4.0 (English version)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-5
UMN
5.2.1
Start-up LCT Operation

Connect the LCT terminal to the SV unit of SCSU block with an RS232C straight cable (9-pin D-sub male to female).
Warning
If you use a desk top PC, connect ground terminals together to prevent likely damage to components due to electrical surges. Turn on the power of LCT terminal, then start the LCT application. Log on to NE (SRT 1F equipment) When the LCT screen appeares, click [ Logon ] button of the Tool Bar (2) and wait until Tid.log window comes up. Enter System ID (TID), User name, Password and click [ OK ]. Figure 5.3 shows an example of LCT display after logging on. If you cannot log on to NEs (Network Element; SRT 1F equipment), check the communication setting between the LCT and the local NE by opening Session Comm setup from the Main Menu Bar (1). When the LCT has logged on to the NE, the Shelf window (4) and Global View (3) will be displayed on the screen. Multiple Log on Maximum 3 NEs in the DCC (Digital Communication Channel) can be logged on simultaneously by a LCT terminal. However you cannot log on to any NE outside of the DCC area of the connected LCT. Alarm Report Alarm summary of NE is indicated through a change of the colours of the icons on the Global View window.
Icon of Unit picture Red Icon on Global View Red Orange Yellow Brown Green (LED mode 2) Yellow (LED mode 1) Green (LED mode 2) Yellow (LED mode 1) Alarm Severity Critical Major Minor Warning Normal
5-6
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN Alarm/Control
To supervise/control the logged NE, click Status/Control of Main Menu Bar (1) and select the sub-menu following the LCT command tree. Details of the LCT command tree are available in this manual.
(1) File Session TL1 Provisioning Status/Control Administration Window Help Options About Close TL1 (2) Logon Logoff Open
Global View COMMON SCSU SCSU Group 1 GROUP1 - MSTU GROUP1 - BBIU Group 2 GROUP2 - MSTU GROUP2 - BBIU
Exit
(3)
Group 1 : GROUP1 - MSTU
A

(4) (5) (6)
M S T U P
M S T U W 1
C
M S T U W 2
C
M S T U W 3
C
(7) UNIT LINE
(8) SENT>> RTRV-LED-ALL::

RESP>>11-12-2001
Note : (1) : Main Menu Bar (2) : Tool Bar (3) : Global View (4) : Shelf Window (5) : Unit Picture (6) : Check mark (C mark) to show applicable unit (7) : Alarm Icon of Unit picture (8) : Output
Figure 5.3 - Example of LCT Display Quick View/Control (click right button) For quick view/control of NE, click the right mouse button on the applicable space. Menus required for routine operation & maintenance will be displayed. New/Last alarm reports are displayed by clicking the right mouse button. Last Alarm Report: the alarm message already retrieved. New Alarm Report: the alarm message newly generated after the previous retrieve command. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-7

Global View window Open space of Shelf window Unit of Shelf window : All alarms of the NE : All alarms of the shelf selected : Alarms of the unit selected
UMN
Table 5.5 shows the quick view/control menu of each unit. Table 5.5 - Quick View/Control (Right Click)
Shelf
MSTU
BBIU
BB INTF BBC
SCSU
SV ECU HK TCU
Unit
New Alarm Report : Card Last Alarm Report : Card New Alarm Report : Shelf Last Alarm Report : Shelf Close Shelf Set OHB Set RSPI Set Radio Channel Set Facility Threshold Set Level Threshold Set Automatic Transmit Control ALS Release (OPT INTF only) Display Log Files Display Current Level Display History Level Display Threshold Crossing Seconds Display CSES Log Change Maintenance State Radio Physical Interface RSPI Adjustment Display Equipment Inventory Display Unit Inventory
V V V V V (V)* V V V V V
V V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V
V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
Note: * Set OHB of MSTU is not applicable if BBIU is installed.
5-8
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN Auto Report
If wanting the NE to display the latest conditions automatically reflecting any change of alarm/status, execute Status/Control Auto Report Control Allow Alarm Report Allow LED Report Allow Report Allow Report is canceled when the user logs off from the NE. Other commands remain valid until the user execute Inhibit Alarm (LED) Report.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-9
5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Unit Status
UMN
Unit status, such as In Service, Out of Service, Active, Standby, Unequipped or Removed, is indicated by the colors of unit icons on the Shelf window as follows:
Color Gray Unit LED = Green* Gray Unit LED = White Green Yellow Purple No color Primary State In Service (IS) In Service (IS) Out of service (OOS) Memory administration (MA) Removed Not configured Out of supervisory through LCT Secondary State Active (ACT) Stand-by (STB)
Unit LED* : Active Unit is green coloured for Mode 2, and yellow for Mode 1.
Selecting Unit Some of Provisioning or Status/Control menus are unit related. Appropriate unit(s) have to be selected before executing the menu command. 1. 2. Select the required menu by clicking on the Main Menu Bar (1) first. To select a unit to be supervised/controlled, click on an applicable unit which is marked with a [ C ]. The selected unit icon will be recessed. Then click any open space within the shelf window to activate the menu command.
3.
It might be possible to select multiple units. However, if selecting mismatched units, the LCT will reject your unit selection by displaying a warning message.
5-10
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5.2.2
Alarm (Condition) Type and Description

This section sorts out alarm details to be indicated by the LCT. Alarm severity can be changed through the LCT if required by the operation conditions. Alarm indications through unit LED are also affected by alarm severity. NA (No Alarm) and NR (No Report) will not be indicated by unit LEDs. NR (No Report) does not send out the message from the NE. NR can reduce the traffic of alarm message on the DCC line. The full list of alarm/condition items and severity change menu are available: Provisioning Facility Set Baseband Interface Set Alarm Attribute
Abb. CR MJ MN NA NR Severity Critical Major Minor No Alarm No Report Not displayed by LED, LCT Messages are not sent out from the NE. Notes Affects on the traffic transmission directly.
Unit MSTU
AID Type EQPT
Alarm Type CARD-FAIL RMVD MISMOUNT-CM MISMOUNT-NC RCI FAN-FAIL XPIC-OFF DEM-FLR MOD-FLR ACTCW RX-FLR
Description Card (Unit) Failure Unit is Removed Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch) Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting) Remote Card Identifier is given Fan Failure XPIC is Off (for co-channel operation system) DEM block Failure QAM DEM LSI failed (Clock loss of QAM DEM LSI) MOD block Failure MOD DEM LSI failed (Clock loss of MOD DEM LSI) Carrier Wave in Active Condition Modulation is suspended for maintenance RX block Failure IF output failure occurred
Status Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Condition Alarm Condition Alarm Alarm Condition Alarm
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-11

Unit MSTU AID Type EQPT Alarm Type ACTEPSOFF ACTSDDADE ACTAGCOFF Description EPS-OFF in Active Condition (for SD reception) SD-DADE in Active Condition MSTU is in SD-DADE adjustment mode AGC-OFF in Active Condition AGC (Automatic Gain Control) of RX is Off (manual) = maintenance FMSR RXLCINT TCA-RLTS TX-FLR ACTALCOFF Frequency Measurement ALC, AGC and EPS are OFF for IF-IF measurement RX Local is Internal (for co-channel operation system)
UMN
Status Condition Condition Condition
Condition Condition
Alert of RX Receive Level Threshold Crossing Condition Seconds TX block Failure TX output level is out of 3 dB ALC-OFF in Active Condition ALC (Automatic Level Control) of TX is Off (Manual) = maintenance Condition Alarm
TCA-TLTS PSFAIL
Alert of TX Transmit Level Threshold Crossing Condition Seconds Power Supply Failure Alarm
MSTU
RSPI
DEM-LOS LOF UAS-RP SUE-RP TUE-RP TCA-RP TCA-OFS FADE-ALM
Loss of Signal in DEM block Input signal loss to QAM DEM LSI Loss of Frame occurred Frame alignment loss of Radio frame. Unavailable Seconds by RP (Radio Parity) Start of Unavailability Event by RP Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by RP Threshold Crossing Alert of RP Threshold Crossing Alert of Out of Frame Second Fading alarm Degradation of received IF spectrum and BER ALM of radio parity occurred
Alarm Alarm Condition Condition Condition Condition Condition Alarm
RADRM RP-ERR MOD-LOS
Radio Route ID Mismatch Excessive Bit Error Rate (RP) Loss of Signal in MOD block Input signal loss to QAM MOD LSI
Alarm Alarm Alarm
5-12
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Unit MSTU AID Type RSPI Alarm Type RX-LOS MN-RCV-DN SD-RCV-DN TX-LOS Description Loss of Signal in RX

Status Alarm
MN-RCV-DN or SD-RCV-DN occurred MN RX Received level Down to squelch level Alarm (equivalent to BER = 10-3) SD RX Received level Down to squelch level Alarm -3 (equivalent to BER = 10 ) Loss of Signal in TX 10 dB down IF input level occurred Alarm
MSTU
WS
LOS
Loss of Signal WS input occurred
Alarm
MSTU
CNCT
XPIC-LOS 6MCLK-LOS
Loss of Signal in XPIC Loss of Clock Signal (6 MHz) Loss of STM-1 reference clock signal (6.48 MHz) from TCU to MSTU
Alarm Alarm
STM-LOS PIN-LOS
Loss of Signal STM Loss of Protection Signal Loss of signal from Prot CH was detected at USW
Alarm Alarm
BBIU
EQPT
OPOR OPD LBOL CARD-FAIL RMVD MISMOUNT-CM MISMOUNT-CN RCI ACTALS ALSTST
Optical Power transmitted is Out of Range (OPT INTF only) Degradation in Optical Power transmitted (OPT INTF only) Laser bias current is too high Laser bias of OPT INTF exceeded the threshold. Card (Unit) Failure Unit is Removed Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch) Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting) Remote Card Identifier is given Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function active ALS of OPT INTF unit is enabled
Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Condition Condition
Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function released Condition by Test restart Laser emission of OPT INTF is restarted by Test = 90 seconds
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-13

Unit BBIU AID Type EQPT Alarm Type ALSMAN Description
UMN
Status
Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) function released Condition by Manual restart Laser emission of OPT INTF is restarted by Manual = 2 seconds
PSFAIL
Power Supply Failure
Alarm
BBIU MSTU*
STM1RS
SUE-B1 TUE-B1 TCA-B1
Start of Unavailability Event by B1 Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by B1
Condition Condition
Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition cumulative number of Background Block Errors by B1 BBE-15M = Background Block Error in 15M period BBE-24H = Background Block Error in 24H period ES-15M = Errored Seconds in 15M period ES-24H = Errored Seconds in 24H period SES-15M = Severely Errored Seconds in 15M period SES-24H = Severely Errored Seconds in 24H period
TCA-LOS LOS STIM UAS-B1
Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due cumulative number of Loss of Signal seconds Loss of Signal occurred Loss of STM1 signal input occurred. Section Trace ID Mismatch occurred Unavailable Seconds (B1)
to Condition Alarm Alarm Alarm
BBIU MSTU
STM1MS
FERF SUE-B2 TUE-B2 TCA-B2
Far End Receive Failure occurred Start of Unavailability Event by B2 Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by B2
Alarm Condition Condition
Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition cumulative number of Background Block Errors of B2 BBE-15M = Background Block Error in 15M period BBE-24H = Background Block Error in 24H period ES-15M = Errored Seconds in 15M period ES-24H = Errored Seconds in 24H period SES-15M = Severely Errored Seconds in 15M period SES-24H = Severely Errored Seconds in 24H period
UAS-FEBE SUE-FEBE TUE-FEBE
Unavailable Seconds of FEBE (Far End Block Error) Start of Unavailability Event by FEBE Termination (finish) of Unavailability Event by FEBE
Alarm Condition Condition
5-14
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Unit BBIU MSTU AID Type STM1MS Alarm Type TCA-FEBE Description

Status
Threshold Crossing Alert occurred due to Condition cumulative number of Background Block Errors by FEBE BBE-15M = Background Block Error in 15M period BBE-24H = Background Block Error in 24H period ES-15M = Errored Seconds in 15M period ES-24H = Errored Seconds in 24H period SES-15M = Severely Errored Seconds in 15M period SES-24H = Severely Errored Seconds in 24H period
SSMBCHG LOOPBACK CSESP
Synchronization Status Message Byte changed Loopback in Active condition
Condition Condition
Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Protection Alarm occurred Error rate of Protection CH exceeded Severely Errored threshold consecutively
FESP TESP FSEP TSEP AIS
Errored Seconds in 15-minute time period Errored Seconds in 24-hours time period Severely Errored Seconds in 15-minute time period Severely Errored Seconds in 24-hours time period Alarm Indication Signal is received Alarm
BBIU
AU4
LOP AIS TCA-PJS
Loss of Pointer occurred Alarm Indication Signal is received
Alarm Alarm
Threshold Crossing Alert of Pointer Justification Condition Seconds BBE-15M = Background Block Error in 15M period BBE-24H = Background Block Error in 24H period ES-15M = Errored Seconds in 15M period ES-24H = Errored Seconds in 24H period SES-15M = Severely Errored Seconds in 15M period SES-24H = Severely Errored Seconds in 24H period
BBIU
UC
LOS
Loss of input Signal
Alarm
BBIU
CNCT
6MCLK-LOS
Loss of Clock Signal (6 MHz) Loss of STM-1 reference clock signal (6.48 MHz) from TCU to MSTU
Alarm
STM-LOS
Loss of Signal STM input
Alarm
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-15

Unit AID Type Alarm Type Description
UMN
Status
SCSU SV EQPT CARD-FAIL LOG-THC TLOG-THC SUBUNIT-FAIL RCI RUC RPS COM CNCT LOS PRCM ACTACO SINT-FAIL Card (Unit) Failure Log memory Threshold Crossed Transaction Log memory Threshold Crossed Sub-unit Failure Remote Card Identifier is given Loss of input Signal of RUC occurred Priority Channel Mismatch Alarm Cut Off in Active Condition Audible alarm extension is cut off Serial Interface Failure Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Condition Alarm Alarm Condition
ECU
EQPT
CARD-FAIL RMVD MISMOUNT-CM MISMOUNT-CN RCI
Card (Unit) Failure Unit is Removed Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch) Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting) Remote Card Identifier is given DCC Failure
Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Condition Alarm
ECU
DCC
DCC-FAIL
HK
EQPT
CARD-FAIL RMVD MISMOUNT-CM MISMOUNT-CN RCI
Card (Unit) Failure Unit is Removed Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch) Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting) Remote Card Identifier is given
Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Condition
TCU
EQPT
CARD-FAIL RMVD MISMOUNT-CM MISMOUNT-CN WKSWP RCI MANSW
Card (Unit) Failure Unit is Removed Unit is Mis-mounted (Configuration Mismatch) Unit is Mis-mounted (No Configuration setting) Working unit is Switched by manually or automatically Remote Card Identifier is given TCU is Manually switched to stand-by to
Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm
Protection Condition Condition Condition
5-16
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Unit AID Type Alarm Type FRCDSW FRZSW PSFAIL TCU CLTBIT LOS-2MB AIS FAL Description

Status Condition Condition Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm
TCU is Forcibly switched to stand-by TCU unit protection is in freeze condition Power Supply failure Loss of 2Mb/s clock signal input Alarm Indication Signal is received Frame Alignment Loss occurred Synchronization loss of Frame Alignment signal occurred
TCU TCU
CLKHZ SYNC
LOS-2MH SWTOHO SWTOINT HOLDOVER
Loss of 2MHz clock signal input Synchronization reference is Switched to Holdover by manually or automatically
Alarm Condition
Synchronization reference is Switched to Internal Condition by manually or automatically Synchronizing clock signal is in Holdover state TCU has lost the input reference clock signal and running in the Holdover mode. Condition
INTERNAL MANSW
EXTCLK-CUTOFF
Synchronizing clock signal is in Internal state TCU is running in the Internal oscillation mode Switch is in Manual switch mode External Clock signal is Cut Off Quality of the synchronization clock signal has deteriorated
Condition Condition Alarm Alarm
TCU
SYNC
QUALITY-DOWN
SYNSWPRI1 SYNSWPRI2 SYNSWPRI3
Synchronization Switched to Priority 1 reference Condition by manually or automatically Synchronization Switched to Priority 2 reference Condition by manually or automatically Synchronization Switched to Priority 3 reference Condition by manually or automatically
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-17
UMN
5.2.3
Performance Monitor
Transmission performances across the SRT 1F section are monitored by detecting parity error of B1 (STM1RS), B2 (STM1MS) and Radio parity (RSPI) (factory user only). Error performances are displayed: Status/Control Performance Monitor Display PM Data Radio Protection Switching count and duration (PSC, PSD) also show the stability of SRT 1F transmission system. PSC and PSD are displayed: Status/Control Radio Protection Switch Group 1 or Group 2 CH No. and BSW/USW selection Display PM Data The following table shows Performance monitor types and their description/threshold level.
Unit(AID)
Monitor Types
Description and Threshold Levels
BBIU or MSTU (STM1MS) (STM1RS) (RSPI = before Error Correction)
BBE
Background Block Error The number of errored block which is detected during the normal operation period except the duration of SES and UAS. 15-MIN : 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215) 1-DAY : 0 to 4294967295 units (default = 4294967295)
BBE for VC4
Background Block Error for VC4 15-MIN : 0 to 65535 units (default = 65535) 1-DAY : 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215)
BBER
Background Block Error Ratio 15-MIN : 0E-0 to 1.4E-7 1-DAY : 0E-0 to 1.4E-9
ES
Errored Seconds The number of second which contains at least one block error during the Available time. 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)
5-18
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Unit(AID) Monitor Types

continued;-BBIU or MSTU (STM1MS) (STM1RS) (RSPI = before Error Correction)
ESR
Errored Second Ratio 15-MIN : 0E-0 to 1.1E-3 1-DAY : 0E-0 to 1.2E-5
SES
Severely Errored Seconds The number of second which contains Errored Blocks (EB) more than Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) during the Available time. 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)
SESR SEV
Severely Errored Second Ratio Severely Errored Threshold The percentage of Errored Block which defines Severely Errored Second (SES) and Unavailability Second (UAS). 10 to 50 % (default = 30)
SEVR UAF
Severely Errored Threshold Ratio 10 to 50 % (default = 30) Unavailability Filter The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) which defines Unavailability Seconds (UAS). 2 to 10 seconds (default = 10)
UAFR UAS
Unavailability Filter Ratio 2 to 10 seconds (default = 10) Unavailability Seconds The continuing period of exceeding Severely Errored Threshold (SEV) which is defined by the Unavailability Filter (UAF). In case of UAF = 10 sec, a period of UAS starts when Errored Block (EB) in each second exceeds SEV for 10 consecutive seconds, and terminates when EB does not exceed SEV for 10 consecutive seconds. 15-MIN : 1 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 1 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)
OFS
Out of Frame Seconds The number of seconds which contains at least one occasion of synchronization loss of the frame alignment signal. 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)
NSES
Number of Severely Errored Seconds Threshold of CSES (Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds) 15-MIN : 2 to 9 seconds (default = 9)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-19
UMN
Unit(AID)
Monitor Types
BBIU (PE INTF)
PJCH PJCL
Pointer Justification Count High Pointer Justification Count Low The number of frame which contains at least one occasion of pointer justification decrement (PJCH) or increment (PJCL). 15-MIN : 0 to 65535 units (default = 65535) 1-DAY : 0 to 16777215 units (default = 16777215)
PJS
Pointer Justification Seconds The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PJCH and/or PJCL. 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)
MSTU (RPS)
PSAC-B PSAC-U
Protection Switch Actual Count BSW Protection Switch Actual Count USW Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation (BSW and USW respectively). 15-MIN : 0 to 1612800 times 1-DAY : 0 to 154828800 times
PSAD-B PSAD-U
Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW Protection Switch Actual Duration USW The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PSACB and PSAC-U respectively. 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds
PSC
Protection Switch Count The total number of PSAC-B and PSAC-U 15-MIN : 0 to 230400 times 1-DAY : 0 to 22118400 times
PSRC-B PSRC-U
Protection Switch Request Count BSW Protection Switch Request Count USW Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including PSACB/U and invalid request due to persistence (BSW and USW respectively). 15-MIN : 0 to 1612800 times 1-DAY : 0 to 154828800 times
PSRSAD-B PSRSAD-U
Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration BSW Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration USW The number of second which contains at least one occasion of Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch operation (BSW and USW respectively). 15-MIN : 0 to 900 seconds 1-DAY : 0 to 86400 seconds
5-20
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5.2.4
Analog Monitor
Analog value of transmitter/receiver of MSTU can be displayed: Status/Control Analog Monitor Display Current Level / History Level / Threshold Crossing Seconds Threshold Level RL-1, RL-2 and TL can be set: Provisioning Facility Set Radio Interface Set Level Threshold Tolerance: 3 dB between 35 65 dB The following table shows Analog Monitor Types and the threshold level.
Display
Monitor Types
Current Level
RL-M
Receive Level of Main Antenna The RF receive level at the input of MSTU from the Main antenna. -15 to -80 dBm
RL-SD
Receive Level of SD (Space Diversity) Antenna The RF receive level at the input of MSTU from the SD antenna. -15 to -80 dBm
TL
Transmit Level The RF transmit level at the output of MSTU. +19 to +35 dBm
History Level
RL-M-MAX
Receive Level of Main Antenna Maximum The maximum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm
RL-M-MIN
Receive Level of Main Antenna Minimum The minimum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm
RL-SD-MAX
Receive Level of SD Antenna Maximum The maximum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-21

Display Monitor Types Description and Threshold Levels
UMN
continued;-History Level
RL-SD-MIN
Receive Level of SD Antenna Minimum The minimum receive level during the monitoring period. 15-MIN: -15 to -80 dBm 1-DAY : -15 to -80 dBm
TL-MAX
Transmitted Level Maximum The maximum transmit level during the monitoring period. +19 to +35 dBm
TL-MIN
Transmitted Level Minimum The minimum transmit level during the monitoring period. +19 to +35 dBm
Threshold Crossed Seconds
RLTS-M-1 RLTS-M-2 RLTS-SD-1 RLTS-SD-2 TLTS
Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of Main Antenna specified by RL-1 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of Main Antenna specified by RL-2 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of SD Antenna specified by RL-1 Receive Level Threshold crossed Seconds of SD Antenna specified by RL-2 Transmit Level Threshold crossed Seconds 15-MIN: 1 to 900 seconds (default = 900) 1-DAY : 1 to 86400 seconds (default = 86400)
Threshold Level Setting
RL-1 RL-2 TL
Receive Level Threshold 1 15-MIN: -40 to -75 dBm (default = -60 dBm) Receive Level Threshold 2 15-MIN: -40 to -75 dBm (default = -60 dBm) Transmit Level Threshold 15-MIN: +22 to +32 dBm (default = +27 dBm)
5-22
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5.2.5
Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI)

The Radio Section Physical Interface (RSPI) menu group is provided for the testing and special maintenance of the MSTU radio section. This menu group affects the channel traffic. Before executing any control on this menu group, switch over the traffic to the protection channel and change the Maintenance State of the channel to Remove. Status/Control Maintenance Radio Interface Change Maintenance State (Carry out before following sub-menus) Radio Physical Interface RSPI Adjustment Maintenance for SD Maintenance for Co-CH Dade Adjustment
Sub-Menu
Item
Description
Change Maint. State
Remove Restore Retrieve
Changes to Maint. State for following sub-menus. Changes to In Service State for normal operation. Displays the current status. Stops modulation. Stops AGC of RX block for IF-IF characteristics measurement.
Radio Physical Interface
Carrier Wave ON Auto Gain Cont. Off Auto Off Level
Cont. Stops ALC of TX block for IF-IF characteristics measurement. Executes AGC OFF, ALC OFF and EPS OFF at once for IF-IF characteristics measurement. Adjusts TX output power at ALC ON. Adjusts TX output power at ALC OFF. Adjusts MN/SD 70M OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF Adjusts XPIC OUT slope at AGC OFF Stops SD DADE. Stops Endless Phase Shifter (EPS). Stops Cross Polarization Interference Cancellor. Stops RX Local synchronization. Adjusts baseband DADE for hitless RPS (USW) operation. Displays above items in maintenance position.
Frequency Measurement RSPI Adjustment (Analog level adjustment) TXPWR TXGAIN RXRFGAIN RXIFGAIN SDGAIN SDSLOPE Maintenance for SD SD DADE OFF EPS OFF Maintenance for Co-CH XPIC-OFF RXCLINT Dade Adjustment Display Maint. State DADEADJST
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-23
UMN
5.3
Radio Protection Switch

Supervise/control of Radio Protection Switch (RPS) is carried out through the LCT terminal. Log on The LCT must log on to the receive end of the direction to be supervised/controlled. To control the reverse direction, log in to the opposite station (NE). To open the Radio Protection Switch (RPS) window: Control/Status Radio Protection Switch Group 1 nd Group 2 (for 2 RPS group if the system has) To open the RPS window of the other NE, log on to the 2nd NE then repeat the above process. To display two windows simultaneously: Window Tile Figure 5.4 shows the Radio Protection Switch window. USW/BSW The Unipolar Switch (USW) is operated Uni-directionally and in the hitless mode for manual control and for most of the automatic switching. The Bipolar Switch (BSW) is operated Bi-directionally and bears some data error. However, the BSW provides more secure isolation for testing and special maintenance work.
Prot Main 1
BB INTF
Prot Main 1
BSW
BB INTF
BSW
Main 2
BB INTF
Main 2
BSW
BB INTF
BSW
Main 3
BB INTF
Main 3
BSW
BB INTF
BSW
Figure 5.4 - Outline of Radio Protection Switch
5-24
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
Lockout Force Manual Alarm

Display SW PM Clear SW PM Set SW Initiator Set Sys
Near End Lockout BU OCC Manual Force BU BU W1

W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7
(5)
W2
Far End Lockout B OCC Force Manual B B W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7

BSW BSW BSW BSW BSW BSW BSW BSW
USW USW USW USW USW USW USW USW
USW USW USW USW USW USW USW USW
BSW BSW BSW BSW BSW BSW BSW BSW
Refresh Close Help
(1)
(3)
(2)
Legend :
Normal : Fail :
(black) (red)
st
(4)
(1)
Control Button
Lockout Force Manual ALARM Display SW PM Data Clear SW PM Data Sets SW Initiator Set Sys Parameter Refresh Close Help
Inhibits any type of RPS operation (1 priority). Forces the SW (2 priority). Operates the SW manually (4 priority) . Displays the AID = RPS alarm. Displays PSAC, PSRC, PSAD and PSRSAD. Clears SW PM data above. Sets SW Initiator Enable/No. Sets Max. CH, Priority CH, WTR and OCC Redraws the window to refresh the current condition. Close the RPS window. Displays Help. Selects the SW for control (Bi-directional). Selects the SW for control (Uni-directional). Normal (Released). Controlled (Operated) Main 1 channel to Main 7 channel. Occasional traffic (option).
th nd
(2)
SW Box
BSW USW
(3)
Manual Control in Green Indicator in Red Channel No. W1 to W7 OCC
(4)
(5)
W2
Switched CH No. indication. This example shows Bi-directional auto switching by W2 unit failure.
Figure 5.5 - Radio Protection Switch window
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-25
UMN
5.3.1
Automatic Switching and Status Indication

Normal CH is shown as a black solid line Failed CH is shown as a red dotted line The switched channel No. is displayed on the line of Prot. CH (5). A single arrow shows Uni-directional switching by USW. A double arrow shows Bi-directional switching by BSW. A red circled Manual Control Indicator (3) shows that the switch element is operated for Lockout, Force or Manual switching. Figure 5.5 shows the example that automatic Bi-directional switching of W2 (Main 2) is due to unit failure. In case of automatic switching, BSW operation caused by MSTU unit failure has priority over USW operation. Signal Failure (SF = Loss of Frame) has priority over Signal Degrade (SD = BER ALM and 1bit error) A priority channel shall be set to have priority over other channels, if the switch initiator is at the same level.
5.3.2
Manual Control
The Radio Protection Switch (RPS) can be controlled manually through the LCT terminal. The following are the functions and priority order of the manual controls:
Control Priority Function
st
Lockout Force (Automatic)
1 2
Inhibits any type of RPS operation. Switches the Main CH unless the specified Main CH or Prot CH is locked out. The Main CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot CH is free and normal. The CH switched by Manual or OCC control will be chased out by automatic switching from Prot CH.
nd
rd
Manual OCC
4 5
th
The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot CH is free and normal. Occasional traffic transmission (option) The lowest priority traffic is allowed when Prot CH is free and normal. The OCC traffic gives way to any other RPS command.
th
To operate manual control: Click BSW or USW (2) of Near End, the SW box changes color from green to red. Click Control button (1) confirmation boxes. as required, then follow the instruction of
The Manual Control Indicator (3) changes color from green to red. SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-26
UMN
5.3.3
SW PM Data
Switch Performance Monitoring (SW PM) Data shows the stability of radio propagation condition and RPS operation. Following items will be displayed;-PSAC-B PSAC-U PSAD-B PSAD-U PSC PSRC-B PSRC-U PSRSAD-B PSRSAD-U Protection Switch Actual Count BSW / USW Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation. Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW / USW The number of second which contains at least one occasion of PSAC-B / PSAC-U. Protection Switch Count The total number of PSAC-B and PSAC-U Protection Switch Request Count BSW / USW Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including PSAC-B/U and invalid request due to WTR and persistence. Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration BSW / USW The number of second which contains at least one occasion of Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch operation.
5.3.4
Auto Refresh
To display the current status, click Refresh control button.
If wanting to maintain the RPS window to automatically display the latest change, execute: Status/Control Auto Report Control Allow Report when you log on to the NE. Allow Report is automatically canceled if logging out from the NE.
Note : Auto Refresh function of RPS is subject to Alarm/condition setting.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-27
UMN
5.3.5
Notice for RPS Operation

Operation of the Radio Protection System is very sensitive to traffic transmission. Following notice should be observed.
5.3.5.1
Power off of SCSU When turning off the power supply to SCSU, change the service state of RPS to OOS (Out of Service) in advance. Otherwise, the traffic may be briefly interrupted when turning on the power supply. Provisioning Service State Change RPS State Group 1 or Group 2 Delete Then log off the LCT from the NE.
5.3.5.2
Lockout WTR (Wait to Restore) also affects the LOCKOUT command also. If WTR is 4 (minutes) or 20 (minutes), the LOCKOUT command will be effective after the time delay specified by WTR. If wanting to execute the LOCKOUT immediately, change WTR setting to 0 as follows: Provisioning System Set Radio Protection System Set System Parameter Wait to Restore 0 min
5.3.5.3
Power off of MSTU To prevent disconnection, the traffic should be BSW manually switched over to the Protection channel in advance. Status/Control Radio Protection Switch Group 1 or Group 2 BSW of the channel to be switched off Manual Operate Note: BSW operation is not hitless and briefly interrupts traffic. If the USW is operated on such occasion, the message indicating USW operated will remain during the period that MSTU is power off.
5-28
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5.4
5.4.1
Maintenance Control of Other Functions

Loop Back
The Siemens SRT 1F is provided with the baseband loop back function. LINE side : From Baseband input to Baseband output (Facility) RADIO side: From DEM QAM module output to MOD QAM module input (Terminal). Without BBIU For the standard configuration of SE interface, the loop back is carried out at the MSTU unit. With BBIU For optional configuration of OPT interface and PE interface, loop back is carried out at the OPT INTF unit and the PE INTF unit, respectively. Loop Back test interrupts channel traffic. To safeguard traffic transmission, Loop Back operation is monitored through the Maintenance State . Before carrying out Loop Back, Change Maintenance State to remove the In Service state from the channel. To carry out Loop Back test: Control/Status Loop Back Change Maintenance State Select the unit to be looped back STM1MS LINE or STM1MS RADIO Remove (Restore is to release loopback)
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-29

MSTU MOD TX BSW DEM RX LINE side RADIO side
UMN
BBIU BSW
MSTU MOD TX DEM RX
LINE side
RADIO side
Figure 5.6 - Loop Back Operation
5-30
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5.4.2
5.4.2.1
Protection Switch Operation (MSP)

Multiplex Section Protection In case of OPT INTF line protection, MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) is provided. In addition to automatic switching, MSP can be operated through the LCT either manually or inhibited from automatic switching. To carry out MSP manual operation: Control/Status of BBIU Protection Switch Operate Protection Switch Select the channel to be operated STM1MS LINE MAN for manual switch or FRCD for forced switch or LOCKOUT to inhibit automatic switch Priority Order of MSP is: Lockout > Forced > Auto (Signal Failure) > Auto (Signal Degrade) > Manual
5.4.2.2
TCU unit Protection In case of TCU unit protection (two units of X and Y installed), the manual switch over of the working TCU is available through the LCT. To change the working TCU;-Control/Status of SCSU Protection Switch Operate Protection Switch Select the TCU to remove from working condition EQPT MAN for manual switch or FRCD for forced switch or LOCKOUT to inhibit automatic switch
5.4.2.3
Synch Switch The synchronous source is automatically selected to the highest quality level currently available. The user can select the synchronous source manually, if necessary. To change the synchronous source manually: Control/Status of SCSU Protection Switch Operate Synch Switch Select the TCU to change the synchronous source EC for Equipment clock or LC for Line clock PRI 1/PRI 2/PRI 3/INT/HO INT (Internal) and HO (Holdover) are not suitable for traffic transmission.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-31
UMN
5.4.3
ALS Release
Laser emission of OPT INTF unit is automatically shutdown when the fiber optic cable is disconnected for personnel safety. Then the OPT INTF retransmits the output intermittently to recover the signal transmission at a specific interval. ALS Release is provided to restart the Laser emission through manual control, in addition to normal restarting stated above. MAN : Emits OPT INTF output for 2 seconds TST : Emits OPT INTF output for 90 seconds To operate ALS Release: Control/Status of BBIU ALS Release Select the channel to be operated Restart Mode MAN for 2 seconds emission or TST for 90 seconds emission.
5-32
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5.5
Unit Replacement
Warning Most of the unit replacement operations affect on the traffic transmission service. The maintenance staff must inform these operations to the Central Maintenance & Operation Center (CMOC) in advance.
5.5.1
Fan Replacement
An MSTU is equipped with 4 air cooling fans. These fans should be replaced with spares when they are worn out. Table 5.6 shows the relationship of FAN alarm and equipment condition. When FAN alarm is detected, all 4 fans should be replaced with spares at once. Table 5.6 - FAN Alarm and Equipment Condition
Number of Fan Working 4 3 2 1 Out 0 1 2 3 Alarm No alarm FAN Alarm FAN Alarm UNIT Failure Equipment Condition of MSTU Normal operation Normal operation TX output power is 10 dB down Power supply off to MSTU. BSW operates
How to replace FANs 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn the rotary switch on MSTU to [ F ] to switch TX output to LOW level and inhibit Fan alarm. See Figure 5.7. Pull out the FAN PWR cable. Remove the FAN assembly. See Figure 5.7. Mount a new FAN assembly and re-connect the FAN PWR cable securely. Turn back the rotary switch on MSTU to [ 0 ] Check alarm/status indications on LEDs and LCT. If normal, switch back the traffic from the protection channel.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-33
UMN
Turn to [ F ] to switch TX output to LOW level and inhibit Fan alarm
The FAN Assembly is mounted on to the MSTU by 4 long screws to and 4 short screws to . Figure 5.7 - Replacement of FAN Assembly
5-34
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5.5.2
MSTU and Other Units

MSTU To replace an MSTU, the traffic should be switched over to the protection channel by forcing the BSW in advance, and by cutting off power to the unit. The BSW operation momentarily interrupts traffic. OPT INTF and PE INTF The traffic cannot be protected during the replacement work, unless the line (facility) is protected by MSP (for OPT INTF - X/Y only). The maintenance staff must carefully organize unit replacement in order to reduce traffic disconnection period. Units in SCSU Replacement of any unit other than that listed below may seriously affect traffic: TCU in stand-by (in case of card protection of TCU-X/Y). HK unit.
System Setting Data System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU. When a unit is replaced with spares, the system setting data will be automatically transferred from the SV unit. There is no setting change after unit replacement. After unit replacement: Turn on power supply and wait at least 10 minutes to complete the system setting data download. Check LED indication on SRT 1F equipment. Check Alarm/status indication of Status/Control menu on the LCT. Check Analog Monitoring of Status/Control menu on the LCT. Check the applicable system setting of Provisioning menu on the LCT. Check that Service State is In Service of Provisioning menu on the LCT. Leave equipment for stability check at least 30 minutes. Check Error Performance history by Display PM of Status/Control menu on the LCT. Compare the above data with other channels. Minimize setting change and re-adjustment of the replaced unit unless performance does not meet the long term specification. If setting change and re-adjustment is required, follow the instructions stated in par. Acceptance and Turn up of this manual.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-35
UMN
5.5.3
SV unit Replacement
System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU. The data is stored in the Inner Memory on the main PCB and also in the Back-up Memory on the sub-unit. To replace the SV unit with a spare: Check that the RPS is in normal condition (no protection switch operation). Change the Service State of RPS from In Service (IS) to Out of Service (OOS). Provisioning Service State Change RPS State Group 1 or Group 2 Delete Log off the LCT from the NE. Wait until when (approx. 4 minutes) BACK UP LED of SV unit turns off
Cut off power supply to the SCSU and remove the SV unit. Remove the Back-up Memory sub-unit form the SV main PCB. Fit the Back-up Memory sub-unit on to the spare SV. Mount the spare SV on to the SCSU and turn on power supply to the SCSU. Wait until when ACS/SWDL (approx. 5 minutes) Log on the LCT to the NE. Check LED indications SRT 1F equipment and Alarm/status conditions on the LCT. Change the Service State of RPS from Out of Service (OOS) to In Service (IS). Provisioning Service State Change RPS State Group 1 or Group 2 Enter LED of SV unit turns off
5-36
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Check the RPS operations. If traffic interruption is not possible, check Manual operation of USW. If the failure of SV unit is extended to the RPS total operation, check all related functions.
Figure 5.8 shows the PCB of SV unit.
WARNING
Do not cut off power supply to the SCSU unit when BACK UP LED is glowing, otherwise the system setting data may be damaged seriously.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-37
UMN
VF/DGTL sub-unit
VF/DGTL sub-unit
Screw
Front side
Backup Memory
Connector side
Screw
Figure 5.8 - PCB of SV unit Caution --
This unit contains devices that may be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD) Observe all precautions relating to the safe handling of ESD sensitive equipment.
5-38
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5.5.4
Returning Replaced Unit

Units for SRT 1F equipment are manufactured based on high density assembling and require special tools, jigs and measurement equipment for repair. Faulty unit should be returned to the manufacturer for repair For quick and adequate repair work, the following information must be stated on the unit. Unit name Serial No. Station name Facing station name Frequency band Channel No. System configuration Date and time alarm/abnormality detected Date and time the unit replaced Detailed description of alarm/abnormality Alarm/status log of the local station and associated stations Error performance log of the local station and associated stations Detailed description after unit replacement
The user can use its own report form. Table 5.7 shows an example of Faulty Unit Report
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-39
5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE Table 5.7 - Faulty Unit Report (example)
UMN
FAULTY UNIT REPORT

Unit Name Station Name Freq. Band System Configuration No. of Main CHs BB Interface SE INTF OPT INTF with MSP OPT INTF w/o MSP PE INTF Prot CH Operation Sys TCU Yes No Alternated Co-channel with Stand-by without Stand-by No Serial No. Facing Station CH No. Freq.) (TX
If you are returning an MSTU, please fill the below;-TX output dBm, level (specification) = SD = Yes
Modulation Sys = 64QAM 128QAM Date/time hh:mm) Alarm detected (mm/dd/yy. (mm/dd/yy.
Date/time Unit replaced hh:mm)
Details of alarm/status and other conditions of before unit replacement
Details of alarm/status and other conditions of after unit replacement
Other comments if any
Compiled by Checked by Approved by
Date (mm/dd/yy) Date (mm/dd/yy) Date (mm/dd/yy)
5-40
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
5.6
5.6.1
APPENDIX
LCT Command Tree and Functions
The following table shows the Command tree of LCT (Local Terminal) and related functions.
No. 1 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3
LCT Command File Logfile PC Message Log NE Commands Log Transaction Log
Unit
Functions
All
Displays the logged history of Personal Computer Displays the logged history of NE commands Displays the logged history of Transaction message
1.2
Preference
All
Sets Alarm retrieve*, Alarm beep, Access mode, Auto time out * Alarm retrieve = mother option for Auto Report Control
1.3
Exit
All
Exits from the LCT application and close the LCT initial screen
2 2.1 2.2* 2.2.1* 2.2.2* 2.2.3* 2.2.4* 2.2.5* 2.2.6*
Session * Log on Comm Setup (before log on) Port Setup Modem Setup Modem Dial Modem Hang-up PAD Dial PAD Hang-up * * * * * * Sets Port No., Baud rate, Data bits, Stop bits, Parity Sets Modem type, Dial prefix/suffix, Hangup prefix/suffix, Originate Seq. for connection via Modem Establishes communication via Modem Abandons Modem dial Establishes communication via PAD Abandons PAD dial All Logs on to NEs
2.3 2.4 2.5
Log off Re-configure Screen ASCII Terminal
All All All
Logs off from NEs Redraws the shelf picture to reflect configuration change Opens Hyper Terminal to access to NE
3 3.1
TL1 TL1 Command All Creates and sends TL1 commands
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-41
UMN
No.
4
LCT Command
Provisioning
Unit
Functions
4.1
Service State
Changes Primary service state IS (In Service) and OOS (Out of Service) Enter = Changes from OOS to IS Delete = Changes from IS to OOS Retrieve = Displays current service state BBIU BBIU All All All Service state of BB INTF unit Service state of STM1RS facility Service state of Radio Protection System Service state of RPS Group 1 Service state of RPS Group 2
4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 a b
Change EQPT State Change Facility State Change RPS State Group 1 Group 2
4.2 4.2.1 a
Facility Set Baseband Interface Set OHB All BBIU (MSTU) Usage of RSOH and MSOH STM1RS = J0, E1, D1 to D3, B1 STM1MS = MS AIS, MS FERF, E2, D4 to D12 SSBIT, B2, K1K2, Z1,Z2 Threshold level of error performance STM1RS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS STM1MS = SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, AU4 = PJS Excessive Error initiator Signal Fail/Signal Degrade Signal Degrade Threshold = 1E-5 to 1E-9 Alarm severity and SA/NSA of following items MSTU EQPT = CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, FAN-FAIL, XPIC-OFF, DEM-FLR, MOD-FLR, ACTCW, RX-FLR, ACTEPSOFF, ACTSDDADE, ACTAGCOFF, FMSR, RXLCINT, TCA-RLTS, TX-FLR, ACTALCOFF, TCA-TLTS, PSFAIL RSPI = DEM-LOS, LOF, UAS-RP, SUE-RP, TUE-RP, TCA-RP, TCA-OFS, FADE-ALM, RADRM, RPERR, MOD-LOS, RX-LOS, SD-RCV-DN, TXLOS WS = LOS CNCT = XPIC-LOS, 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS, PIN-LOS
Set Facility Threshold
BBIU
Set Facility Group
BBIU
d 4.2.1d MSTU
Set Alarm Attribute Set Alarm Attribute
5-42
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN No.
4.2.1d BBIU
5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE LCT Command

Set Alarm Attribute
Unit
BBIU
Functions
EQPT = OPOR, OPD, LBOL, CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MIMOUNT-CM/NC, RCI, ACTALS, ALSTST, ALSMAN, PSFAIL STM1RS = SUE-B1, TUE-B1, TCA-B1, TCA-OFS, LOS, STIM, UAS-B1 STM1MS = FERF, SUE-B2, TUE-B2, TCA-B2, UASFEBE, SUE-FEBE, TUE-FEBE, TCA-FEBE, SSMBCHG, LOOPBACK, CSESP, FESP, TESP, FSEP, TSEP, AIS AU4 = LOP, AIS, TCA-PJS UC = LOS CNCT = 6MCLK-LOS, STM-LOS
4.2.1d SCSU
Set Alarm Attribute
SCSU
SV = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, LOG-THC, TLOG-THC, SUBUNIT-FAIL, RCI). RUC (LOS). RSC (LOF). DCC (DCC-FAIL). RPS (PRCM). COM (ACTACO). CNCT (SINT-FAIL) ECU1,2 = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNTCM/NC, RCI). DCC (DCC-FAIL) HK1,2 = EQPT (same as ECU1,2) TCU = EQPT (CARD-FAIL, RMVD, MISMOUNTCM/NC, WKSWP, RCI, MANSW, FRCDSW, FRZSW, PSFAIL). CLKBIT (LOS-2MB, AIS, FAL). CLKHZ (LOS-2MH). SYNC (SWTOHO, SWTOINT, HOLDOVER, INTERNAL, MANSW, EXTCLK-CUTOFF, QUALITY-DOWN, SYNSW PRI1/2/3)
4.2.1e e1 e2 f f1 f2 4.2.2 a b c d e f 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5
Set Trace Set OHB Set Trace Value Set Signal Label Set OHB Set SLB Value Set Radio Interface Set RSPI Set Radio Channel Set Facility Threshold Set Level Threshold Set Auto Transmit Control Set RSC Set Way side traffic Set User Channel Set Radio User Channel
BBIU BBIU BBIU BBIU BBIU BBIU MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU All MSTU BBIU All Recovery (and Generation) of BERALM, Route ID, SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N) Frequency CH, Local Clock Master/Slave, MOD/DEM function SEV, NSES, BBE, ES, SES, OFS RL-1, RL-2, TL (dBm) ATPC Mode (LOW/HIGH/AUTO) ATPC Initiator Level (dBm) X(Prot)/Y(Main), DSC SEL (P/W1 to 7) SOHWS (Y/N), RFCOHWS (Y/N) 64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA) RUCVFT(dBr), 64K Interface (CODIRE/CONTRA) RUCVFR(dBr), Inhibit Usage of SOH for signal label Signal label value J0 Byte (N/STMID/TRC) for Trace Expect Trace, Sending Trace, MIS-STI Alarm OFF
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-43
5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE No.

4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3
UMN Unit Functions
LCT Command
System Set NE ID Set Date and Time Set System Configuration
All All All
NE ID = TID = System ID Current date and time System Type, RF Type, FRQ Arrangement, Space Diversity, Line Interface, BBIU Use, Group1 Max CH, Group2 Max CH, Group 1 RPS (Y/N), Group 2 RPS (Y/N) ECU (Y/N), HK unit (Y/N), TCU Protection Sets BB INTF configuration N/OPTL1/OPTL2/OPTL3 Standard time for Performance Monitor start Alarm Severity, Alarm Type, Alarm Message Control Type ALM ACT Time (0/2.5/10), ALM DACT Time (0/16)
4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.3.7 4.3.8 4.3.9 4.3.10 a b
Set Optional Unit Configuration
All
Set Interface Configuration All Set PM Time Set Housekeeping Alarm Set Ext. Control Name Set Alarm Delay Set Synchronization Set Synch Mode Set Synch Parameter All SCSU SCSU All All All All
Synch Mode = CLK MODE (TCU/THROUGH), EC Priority (1/2), LC Priority (1/2/3), Ext 2Mhz, Ext 2Mb/s, EC output 2Mbit EC Threshold, LC Threshold, Error Free (Y/N)
4.3.11 a b 4.3.12
Set Radio Protection Sys Set System Parameter Set SW Initiator Set MSP All All BBIU Maximum CH, Priority CH, Wait to Restore, OCC Use SW Initiator (Y/N) Lock in Function, Switching Count, Monitor Time, Hold Time, Direction, Persist Check Time, Uni/Bi Code Mask, MSP Mode Setting ALS Function (Y/N), Release Time Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No. NE-Type, Resource Status, Eqpt-Note Loopback RLS Time (hour)
4.3.13 4.3.14 4.3.15 4.3.16 a b c d 4.3.17
Set ALS Set Equipment Inventory Set LBK Release Time Set Orderwire Set OHB Channel Select OW Function OW Extension Set LED Mode
BBIU All
BBIU All All All All
E1 (Y/N), E2 (Y/N) E1/2 (N/GP-W1/ GP-W2/....) OW Function (Y/N), Group Address, Station Address, LED, Buzzer, Relay, Ringer OW Extension E1/2, OW VF TX/RX (-dBr) Mode 1 (Normal = yellow) / Mode 2 (Normal = green)
5-44
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN No. LCT Command Unit Functions
4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3
Section DCC SDCC Service State LAPD Parameter Set 2 DCC

nd
All All All
In service/Out of Service Window Size, Frame Timeout, Inact Timeout, Retries, Frame Size, LAPD Cmd/Rsp, LAPD Data Link 2 DCC CH selection
nd
4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3
OSS Interface OSSI type & Service State All LAPB Parameter X25 Parameter All All X25/OSI/Back to Back, IS/OOS Type, Window Size, Retry Timer, Packet Size, Retransmit X25 Address, Packet Size, Window Size, Confirmation, Restart Timer, Request Timeout, Reset Timeout, Clear Timeout, Closed User ID, Channel-Lower, ChannelUpper PVC = Group No. CH NO. Peer Address SVC = Peer Address, Packet Size, Window Size, Confirmation, Ntwk User ID
4.5.4
VC Parameter
All
4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5
Network Layer Protocol NLP Parameter NLP Manual Adjacency NLP Address Prefix All All All NLP Type (IS1/IS1 IS2/ES), Area Address, System ID NLP Type (SVC/PVC), Area Address, System ID NLP Type (SVC), Area Prefix Manual Area Address Scope (LCL/NTWK) Max Area Reachable Area Address TID Address Resolution Protocol Control All All All All All TARP Type, Response Time Adjacency NTWK Address, Destination NTWK Address, NPL Type Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address Destination NE ID, Destination NTWK Address, TID List Destination TID, System ID, NTWK Address, Request Working Address, Retries, Response Timer, TID List TARP Packet, Packet Size, LAN SAP, Service State
NLP Manual Area Address All Display NLP Manual Area Address NLP Intermediate Sys1 NLP Intermediate Sys2 TARP Control TARP Parameters TARP Manual Adjacency Display TARP Manual Adjacency Display TARP Cache Operate TARP Echo All All All
4.8
LAN Parameters
All
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-45
UMN
No.
5 5.1 5.1.1
LCT Command
Status/Control Shelf Condition Display Log files
Unit
Functions
All
AID, AID Type, Alarm Severity, Condition Type, Service Effect, Monitor Value, Threshold Level, Location, Direction, Occurred Time, Cleared Time, Condition Description Same as Display Log Files Clears Log files AID, AID Type, Alarm Severity, Condition Type
5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4
Display All Log files Clear Log files Display List
All All
Maintenance All
5.2 5.2.1
Radio Protection Switch Group 1 All Lockout, Force, Manual, Alarm, Display SW PM Data, Clear SW PM Data, Set SW Initiator, Set System Parameter Same as Group 1
5.2.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2
Group 2 Service State Display Eqpt OOS List Display List Facility
All
All
Displays Equipment in Out of Service condition Displays Facilities in Out of Service condition
OOS All
5.4 5.4.1.
Performance Monitor Display PM Data MSTU BBIU RSPI = BBE, ES, SES, UAS, OFS, BBER, ESR, SESR STM1RS/STM1MS = BBE, ES, SES,UAS,OFS, BBER, ESR, SESR AU4 = PJCH, PJCL, PJCS Deletes Logged PM Data of selected facility Deletes Logged PM Data all
5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4
Clear PM Data Clear PM Data ALL Analog Monitor Display Current Level Display History Level Display TC Second Clear History Data
All All
MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU
RL-M, RL-SD, TL TL-MAX, TL-MIN, RL-M/SD-MIN/MAX TLTS (15M/24H), RLTS-M/SD-1/2 (15M/24H)
5-46
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
No.
5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9
LCT Command
Display CSES Log Housekeeping Alarm External Control Change Maint State
Unit
MSTU BBIU SCSU SCSU MSTU BBIU BBIU BBIU All
Functions
Displays 15 minute data Retrieve Operate/Release Remove = Changes from IS to Maintenance Restore = Changes from Maintenance to IS Retrieve = Displays current status MIS-STI Alarm OFF, Expect Trace, Sending Trace, Incoming Trace Displays Signal Label Disables audible alarm extension
5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.13.1 5.13.2 5.13.3 5.14 5.14.1
Trace Signal Label Alarm Cut Off Loop Back Change Maint State Operate Loopback
BBIU (MSTU) BBIU (MSTU)
STM1MS LINE/RADIO Remove/Restore/Retrieve STM1MS LINE/RADIO = Operate/Release Displays facilities in Loopback
Display Loopback State All Protection Switch Operate Protection SW BBIU SCSU
STM1MS LINE = MAN/FRCD/LOCKOUT for MSP EQPT = MAN/FRCD/LOCKOUT for TCU X/Y EC/LC = PR1/2/3, INT, HO Displays Protection switches operated
5.14.2 5.14.3 5.15 5.15.1 5.15.2 5.15.3 5.15.4 5.15.5 5.15.6
Operate Synch SW Display Prot SW State Maintenance Interface Radio
All All
Change Maint State
MSTU
RSPI = Remove/Restore/Retrieve Carrier Wave ON, Auto Gain Control Off, Auto Level Control Off, Frequency Measurement TXPWR, TXGAIN, SDGAIN, SDSLOPE XPIC-OFF, RXCLINT DADEADJST RXRFGAIN, RXIFGAIN,
Radio Physical Interface MSTU RSPI Adjustment Maintenance for SD Dade Adjustment MSTU MSTU MSTU
SD DADE OFF, EPS OFF
Maintenance for Co-CH MSTU
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-47
UMN
No.
5.15.7 5.16 5.16.1
LCT Command
Display Maint State Physical Inventory Display Inventory
Unit
All
Functions
Displays Controls in maintenance position
Equipment All
AID, Site-Code, Eqpt-Code, Local-No, NE-Type, Resource-Status, Eqpt-Status, NE-Manual-Code, NE-Product-Code, NE-Serial-No, NE-ACPT-Date, NE-WARR-END-Date AID, SIU-Type, SIU-BLD-HW, SIU-MANU-Code, SIU-Serial-No, SIU-Barcode, SIU-ACPT-Date, SIU-WARR-END Date, SIU-BLD-STT Restart Mode = MAN/TST Remote Card Identifier = Operate/Release
5.16.2
Display Unit Inventory
All
5.17 5.18 5.19 5.19.1 5.19.2 5.19.3 5.19.4 5.19.5 5.19.6 5.19.7
ALS Release RCI Control Auto Report Control Allow Alarm Report Inhibit Alarm Report Allow PM Report Inhibit PM Report Allow LED Report Inhibit LED Report Allow Report
BBIU All
All All All All All All All
Allows automatic report of Alarm message Inhibits automatic report of Alarm message Allows automatic report of PM data (every 15M) Inhibits automatic report of PM data Allows automatic report of LED indication on Unit picture Inhibits automatic report of LED indication Validates Allow Alarm Report and Allow LED Report Allow Report is canceled when the user logged of.
5.19.8 a b c 5.20 5.20.1 5.20.1
PM Report Control Periodical Report No data Report Analog data Report Transaction Log Clear Transaction Log All All MSTU All All Report Function [ STD ] = Y/N Report Function [NONDAT] = Y/N Report Function [ LVL ] = Y/N
Display Transaction Log All
5-48
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN
No.
6 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
LCT Command
Administration Add User Delete User Change User Change Logged Password Show User List Show Logged Privilege
Unit
All All All User All All User All
Functions
Adds and defines a new LCT user for the NE Deletes a LCT user from the NE Changes privilege of a user Changes the password of user now logged on to the NE Shows the user list registered for the NE Shows privilege of the user now logged on to the NE
7 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8
Window Cascade Tile Horizontal Tile Vertical Arrange Icons Tool Bar Status Bar Global View Output All All All All All All All All Shows/hides Tool Bar of the LCT screen Shows/hides Status Bar at the bottom of LCT screen Shows/hides Global View window Shows/hides Command message lines at the bottom of LCT screen Controls the stile of screen display
8 8.1 8.2
Help Help About LCT All All Shows the general help of LCT application Shows the version of LCT application.
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
5-49
UMN
A. APPENDIX
APPENDIX
A.1 Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms
Table A.1- Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms
Abbreviation A A/D ACO ACTAGC ACTALS ACTCW ADD ADM AGC AID AIS AIS REC ALC ALM ALSMAN ALSTST AMP ANS ANT APS ASCII ATPC ATT AU 4 AUD NE ALM Analog to Digital converter Alarm Cut Off Act Automatic Gain Control of Receiver Act Automatic Laser Shut down Act Carrier Wave mode Address Add Drop Multiplexer Automatic Gain Control Access Identification Alarm Indication Signal Alarm Indication Signal Receiving Automatic Level Control Alarm Automatic Laser Shut down released by Manual restart Automatic Laser Shut down released by Test restart Amplifier Answer Antenna Automatic Protection Switch American Standard Cord for Information Interchange Automatic Transmitter Power Control Attenuator Administrative Unit 4 Audible Network Element Alarm Description
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
A. APPENDIX Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued)

Abbreviation B B/S BAL BB BBC BBE BBIU BEF BER BIP BPF BR NTWK BRU BSI BSW BWB C C/I CIR CK CLK CMB CMI CN CNCT CODIRE CONTRA CPU CR CSESP Carrier to Interface ratio Circulator Clock Clock Channel management Bus Code Mark Inversion Connector Connect Co-directional interface Contra-directional interface Central Processor Unit Critical Alarm Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Protection Occurred Bit per Second Balance Base Band signal Base Band Control Background Block Error Base Band Interface Unit Band Eliminate Filter Bit Error Ratio Bit Interleave Parity check Band Pass Filter Branching Network(Radio frequency band) Branching Network Unit Bit Sequence Independence Bipolar Switch Back Wired Board Description
UMN
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
UMN Table A1 - Abbreviation of SRT 1F Terms (continued)

Abbreviation D D/A DADE DCC DEF DEM DI DMM DO DSC DTMF DUP E EC ECU EOW EPS EQL ES ESD ETSI F F LOSS FEBE FEC FEFR FESP FET FG FIL FLR FMSR FRCDSW Frame Loss Far End Block Error Forward Error Correction Far End Receive Failure Fifteen minute Error Seconds Performance Field Effect Transistor Frame Ground Filter Failure Frequency Measurement Switch is in Forced Switching mode Equipment Clock Digital to Analog converter Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer Digital Communication Channel Decision Feedback Demodulator Data Input Digital Multi-Meter Data Output Digital Service Channel Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Duplexer Description
A. APPENDIX
Embedded Channel Unit/ Embedded Communication Unit/ Engineering Order Wire Endless Phase Shifter Equalizer Errored Second Electrostatic Discharge European Telecommunication Standard Institute
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Abbreviation G G GAAS GNE GUI GP1 GP2 H H HDB3 HEMT HK HL HL CPU HPA HYB I ICH ID IEC IF INI INTF IS ITU In-phase Channel Identification International Electrotechnical Commission Intermediate Frequency Initiator Interface In Service International Telecommunication Union Horizontal High Density Bipolar 3 High Electron Mobility Transistor Housekeeping Higher Layer Higher Layer Central Processor Unit High Power Amplifier Hybrid circuit Ground Gallium Arsenide Gateway Network Element Graphical User Interface Group 1 Group 2 Description
UMN
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Abbreviation L LAPD LBOL LC L6G L7G L8G LED LL CPU LNA LO LO MON LOF LOP LOS LPF LSI LTE LVL Link Application Procedure D channel Laser Bias current is too High. Line Clock Lower 6 GHz band Lower 7 GHz band Lower 8 GHz band Light Emitting Diode Lower Layer Central Processor Unit Low Noise Amplifier Local Local Monitor Loss Of Frame Loss Of Pointer Loss Of Signal Low Pass Filter Large Scale Integrated circuit Line Terminal Equipment Level Description
A. APPENDIX
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Abbreviation M MAINT MANSW MC MID MISC MIX MJ MLCM MN MN ANT MOD MPU MS MSP MSTU MUX N NA NC NE NEND NFB NLP NMS NORM NSA NWC Not Applicable Not Connection Network Element Near END No Fuse Breaker Network Layer Protocol Network Management System Normal Non Service Affect Network Center Maintenance Manual Switch Maintenance Center Minimum Dispersion combiner Miscellaneous Mixer Major alarm Multi Level Code Modulation Minor alarm Main Antenna Modulator Micro-Processor Unit Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Protection Main Signal Transmission Unit Multiplexer Description
UMN
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Abbreviation O OCC OFS OOS OP AMP OPD OPOR OPT OS OSC OSI OSSI OW TEL P PC PCB PCM PDH PI PJCH PJCL PJCS PLL PLO PM PM DATA PPM PSC PSFAIL PVC PWR Personal Computer Printed Circuit Board Pulse Code Multiplex Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Photo coupler Interface Pointer Justification Count High Pointer Justification Count Low Pointer Justification Count SEcond Phase Lock Loop Phase Lock Loop controlled Oscillator Performance Monitor Performance Monitor Data Percent Per Million Protection Switching Second Power Supply Failure Permanent Virtual Circuit Power Occasional Out of Frame Second Out Of Service Operational Amplifier Degradation in Optical Power transmitted Optical Power transmitted is Out of Range. Optical Operation Software Oscillator Open Systems Interconnection Operation Support System Interface Orderwire Telephone Description
A. APPENDIX
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Abbreviation Q QAM QCH R R CLK RAB RADRM RAM RCI RCK RCLK RAI RCI RCV RD RDP RF RFCOH RL RL-1 RL-2 RL-M RL-SD RLTS RMVD RPS RRF RS RSL RST RUC RX RX-LOS RXLCINT Receive Clock Rack Alarm Bus Radio Route ID Mismatch Random Access Memory Remote Card Identification Receive Clock Receive Clock Remote Alarm Indication Remote Card Identifier Receive Receive Data Receiver Data Processing Radio Frequency Radio Frame Complementary Over Head byte Relay Receiving Level-1 Receiving Level-2 Receiving Level of Main receiver Receiving Level of SD receiver Received Level Threshold Second Required unit is missing Radio Protection Switching Receiver Radio Frequency section Regenerative Section Receive Signal Level Reset Radio service Channel Receiver Loss of Signal in RX RX Local Internal Clock Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Quadrature Channel Description
UMN
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Abbreviation S S CLK SA SC SCSU SD SD-RCV-DN SDH SEMF SES SEV SG SIU SLP EQL SR SS BIT SSMB SSU STD STM-1 SUE-RP SV SVC SW SWDL SWTOHO SWTOINT SYNC SYNSW Send Clock Service Affect Service Channel Switching Control, Supervision Unit Space Diversity SD Receiver Down Synchronous Digital hierarchy Synchronous Equipment Management Function Severely Errored Second Severely Errored Threshold Signal Ground Slide In Unit Slope Equalizer Shift Register Synchronous State Bit Synchronous State Message Byte Synchronous Source Unit Standard Synchronous Transfer Module level 1 Unavailable State Entered (RP) Supervision/Supervisory Switched Virtual Circuit Switch Software Down Load Synchronization reference is in Holdover state Internal source signal is used for Synchronization Synchronization Synchronization Switch Description
A. APPENDIX
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Abbreviation T TARP TCA-OFS TCA-RLTS TCA-RP TCA-TLTS TCK TCLK TCU TD TD N TD P TDP TEL TESP TID TIF TL TL 1 TLTS TRF TVE TX TX-FLR U U6G U8G UAS UC UCH UL USW UAF Upper 6 GHz Upper 8 GHz Un-available Second / Un-available State Users service Channel Users service Channel User Level Layer Unipolar Switch Un-Availability Filter TID Address Resolution Protocol Threshold Crossing AlertThreshold Crossing Alert- RX Level Threshold Threshold Crossing AlertThreshold Crossing Alert-TX Level Threshold Transmit Clock Transmit Clock Timing Control Unit Transmit Data Transmit Data Negative Transmit Data Positive Transmitter Data Processing Telephone Twenty four Hour Error Seconds Target Identification Transmitter IF section Transmitter output Level Transaction Language 1 Transmitted output Level Threshold Second Transmitter RF section Transversal Equalizer Transmitter Transmitter Failure Abbreviation
UMN
10
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Abbreviation V VCO VF VIS NE ALM W WKSWP WR WS WTR X XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Canceller Working unit Switched to Protection Warning Wayside Signal Wait To Restore Voltage Controlled Oscillator Voice Frequency Visual Network Element Alarm Description
A. APPENDIX
SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002
11
SRT 1F Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications

User Manual (UMN) 911-362/02C0000
SRT 1F Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications User Manual (UMN)

911-362/02C0000
SRT 1F
Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications User Manual (UMN)
911-362/02C0000
SRT 1F
Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications User Manual (UMN)
911-362/02C0000

User Manual SRT1F

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual SRT1F

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

SRT 1F Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications UMN

Copyright (C) Fujitsu/Siemens 2002

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP ................................................................................4-1

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE ..............................................................................5-1

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

SDH MUX LTE

SDH MUX ADM

SDH Radio 1+N MS Mode

SDH Radio 1+N MS Mode

SDH MUX LTE

Note: MS : Multiplex Section RS : Regenerator Section

LTE : Line Terminal Equipment ADM : Add Drop Multiplexer

SDH MUX LTE

SDH MUX LTE

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

SDH MUX ADM

SDH MUX ADM

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

SRT 1F Equipment Details

SRT 1F Terminal Equipment Rack

BRU MSTU SCSU

: RF Branching Network Unit Shelf x 1

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

SRT 1F Terminal Equipment Rack

BRU MSTU SCSU

: RF Branching Network Unit Shelf x 2

: Base-Band Interface Unit (option) x 2 BBC : Base-Band Control Unit x 2

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

BRU (Branching Network Unit)

MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit)

Note: SD receiver circuit is equipped as a standard circuit on the SRT 1F receiver.

SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit)

Sub-module of SV unit for RUC (VF, Digital interface or none)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

BBIU (Baseband Interface Unit)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

General Specifications General Information

Repeating Method Overhead Byte Access

Hypothetical Reference Digital Path (HRDP)

In accordance with the latest ITU-R recommendation

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Linearity compensation Local carrier

Local Frequency stability Spurious emission

IF IF input (Test In)

Transmitted output spectrum

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

Figure 1.6 Transmitter output spectrum

(64QAM system, 40 MHz spacing)

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002

SRT 1F 911-362/02C0000 Issue 1, July 2002